Table Of Contents

NE Explorer Information

B.1  CRS-1 NE Explorer

B.1.1  Rack View

B.2  MGX Voice Gateway

B.3  ONS 15216 NE Explorer

B.3.1  Active ONS 15216 NEs

B.3.2  Passive ONS 15216 NEs

B.3.3  ONS 15216 Passive DCU NE Explorer

B.3.4  ONS 15216 DWDM NE Explorer

B.3.5  ONS 15216 FlexLayer NE Explorer

B.3.6  ONS 15216 Passive EDFA NE Explorer

B.3.7  ONS 15216 Active EDFA2 NE Explorer

B.3.8  ONS 15216 Active EDFA3 NE Explorer

B.3.9  ONS 15216 Active OADM NE Explorer

B.3.10  ONS 15216 Passive OADM NE Explorer

B.3.11  ONS 15216 OSC Passive NE Explorer

B.4  ONS 15302 and ONS 15305

B.5  ONS 15310 CL NE Explorer

B.5.1  Node Properties Pane—ONS 15310 CL

B.6  ONS 15327 NE Explorer

B.6.1  Node Properties Pane—ONS 15327

B.7  ONS 15454 SONET NE Explorer

B.7.1  Node Properties Pane—ONS 15454 SONET

B.8  ONS 15454 SDH NE Explorer

B.8.1  Node Properties Pane—ONS 15454 SDH

B.9  ONS 15501 NE Explorer

B.9.1  Identification Tab

B.9.2  Physical Tab

B.9.3  Power Source Tab

B.10  ONS 15530 and ONS 15540

B.11  ONS 15600 SONET NE Explorer

B.11.1  Node Properties Pane—ONS 15600

B.12  ONS 15600 SDH NE Explorer

B.12.1  Node Properties Pane—ONS 15600 SDH

B.13  ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 NE Explorer

B.13.1  Node Properties Pane—ONS 15800, ONS 15801

B.13.2  Rack Properties—ONS 15800, ONS 15801

B.13.3  Subrack Properties—ONS 15800, ONS 15801

B.14  ONS 15808 NE Explorer

B.14.1  Node Properties Pane—ONS 15808

B.14.2  Rack Properties—ONS 15808

B.14.3  Subrack Properties—ONS 15808

B.15  Unmanaged NE/Other Vendor Node Properties Pane

B.15.1  Identification Tab

B.16  XR 12000 NE Explorer

B.16.1  Rack View

NE Explorer Information

---

This appendix provides information on the various NE Explorer windows supported in CTM. This appendix contains the following sections:

•CRS-1 NE Explorer

•MGX Voice Gateway

•ONS 15216 NE Explorer

•ONS 15302 and ONS 15305

•ONS 15310 CL NE Explorer

•ONS 15327 NE Explorer

•ONS 15454 SONET NE Explorer

•ONS 15454 SDH NE Explorer

•ONS 15501 NE Explorer

•ONS 15530 and ONS 15540

•ONS 15600 SONET NE Explorer

•ONS 15600 SDH NE Explorer

•ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 NE Explorer

•ONS 15808 NE Explorer

•Unmanaged NE/Other Vendor Node Properties Pane

•XR 12000 NE Explorer

---

Note In the CTM GUI, read-only fields have a gray background.

---

B.1  CRS-1 NE Explorer

When you choose Configuration > NE Explorer for the Cisco CRS-1, the window displayed by CTM consists of a tree on the left side and a rack view graphic on the right. (See Figure B-1.) The tree provides a hierarchical view and alarm status of the device's racks, slots, ports, and line cards. The Rack View window provides information about the CRS-1 line-card chassis that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. The NE Explorer is ported from the CRS-1 craft web interface (CWI).

The Configuration and Administration menus in the NE Explorer window allow you to configure the CRS-1 device. See 5.4  Configuring the CRS-1 and XR 12000, page 5-29 for detailed information about the Configuration and Administration menu options.

---

Note A user with read-only access can perform read-write operations in the CRS-1 NE Explorer.

---

Figure B-1 NE Explorer—CRS-1

B.1.1  Rack View

The Rack View window displays a graphic of the CRS-1 line-card chassis that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Moving the mouse over the graphic displays the current number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the rack, slot, or card. The right-click menu opens the Alarm Browser or the Alarm Log for the selected entity.

The background color of alarms in the Rack View window corresponds to alarm severity. The background alarm color is not configurable.

You can change the alphanumeric LED display on the route processors. Right-click the route processor, choose Set Character Display, enter the new text, and click OK. The LED display changes on the router in real time.

In addition, you can hide or show the front or rear chassis. Right-click the chassis and choose Hide Front Chassis or Hide Rear Chassis. The menu option changes to Show Front Chassis or Show Rear Chassis.

Use the Magnify icon to zoom in anywhere on the rack view.

B.2  MGX Voice Gateway

The NE Explorer is not available for the MGX Voice Gateway. Equivalent functionality is provided through the Chassis View, which provides a graphical view of equipment status for the operational and alarm status of each card, port, or line. In the Domain Explorer tree, select an MGX node and choose Configuration > MGX Voice Gateway > Chassis View. (See Figure B-2.)

For information about the Chassis View, see 5.12  Configuring MGX Voice Gateway Devices, page 5-200.

Figure B-2 MGX Voice Gateway Chassis View

B.3  ONS 15216 NE Explorer

The NE Explorer for the ONS 15216 displays information about the selected ONS 15216 NE. (See Figure B-3.)

Figure B-3 NE Explorer—ONS 15216 DCU

ONS 15216 NEs are grouped as active NEs or passive NEs. (See Table B-1.) Passive NEs do not have a management interface, so there is no communication between CTM and passive ONS 15216 NEs. For passive ONS 15216 NEs, the NE Explorer summarizes NE information that has been entered manually through the Domain Explorer and also allows you to specify the serial number. For active ONS 15216 NEs, the NE Explorer allows you to view the actual values of settings and parameters on the NE and modify configurable parameters.

Table B-1 ONS 15216 NEs 

Active ONS 15216 NEs	Passive ONS 15216 NEs
ONS 15216 100-GHz OADM	ONS 15216 EDFA1
ONS 15216 EDFA2	ONS 15216 200-GHz OADM
ONS 15216 EDFA3	ONS 15216 100-GHz DWDM Filters
	ONS 15216 200-GHz DWDM Filters
	ONS 15216 OSC
	ONS 15216 DCU
	ONS 15216 FlexLayer

B.3.1  Active ONS 15216 NEs

The Network Element Properties pane for active ONS 15216 NEs displays information specific to the active ONS 15216 erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) and optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) NEs. The properties pane contains the following tabs:

•Status Tab

•Identification Tab

•Address Tab

•NE Authentication Tab

Table B-2 lists the different types of active ONS 15216 NEs.

Table B-2 List of Active ONS 15216 NE Types and Descriptions 

Active ONS 15216 Types	Description
EDFA	Active EDFA with an IP address.
OADM	Active 100-GHz OADM with an IP address. The OADM can be a 1-, 2-, or 4-channel OADM.

B.3.1.1  Status Tab

The Status tab displays status information for the active NE.

Table B-3 Field Descriptions for the Status Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the selected NE.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected ONS 15216 NE.
Alarm Status	Displays the total number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms currently existing on the selected NE.
Communication State	Displays the current connectivity state between CTM and the selected NE. Values are Available or Unavailable.
Operational State	Displays the current operational state of the selected NE and allows you to change the state. Values are In Service, Out of Service, and Under Maintenance.

B.3.1.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays NE identification information.

Table B-4 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the selected NE.
Description	Displays information that user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected ONS 15216 NE.
NE Type	Displays the ONS 15216 NE type.
Vendor Name	Displays the vendor name. The default vendor name is Cisco Systems.
Software Version	Displays the NE software version.
Version Name	Displays the name of the software version.
Location Name	Displays the geographic location of the selected NE.

B.3.1.3  Address Tab

The Address tab provides address information for the NE. If you change an address, the NE is reset automatically to make the new address selection valid.

Table B-5 Field Descriptions for the Address Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the selected NE.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected ONS 15216 NE.
Active IP Address	Displays the IP address of the selected NE.
SNMP Community String	Displays the configured community string name used in Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) messages. The community name is used to determine whether a user has access to the device.
GNE ID	Displays the ID for the gateway NE (GNE) on the selected NE ring.
Subnetwork ID	Displays the name of the subnetwork associated with the selected NE.
Network Partition ID	Displays the name of the network partition associated with the selected NE.

B.3.1.4  NE Authentication Tab

The NE Authentication tab allows you to specify user names and passwords for CTM server and CTM GateWay/TL1 connections to ONS 15216 NEs. Fields shown depend on the type of NE selected.

Table B-6 Field Descriptions for the NE Authentication Tab 

Field	Description
CTM Server - NE Connection
Username	Specify the username that the CTM server uses to connect to ONS 15216 NEs.
Password	Specify the password to use for CTM server-to-NE connections.
Confirm Password	Retype the password to confirm it.
GateWay/TL1 - NE Connection
Username	Specify the username that CTM GateWay/TL1 uses to connect to ONS 15216 NEs.
Password	Specify the password to use for GateWay/TL1-to-NE connections.
Confirm Password	Retype the password to confirm it.

---

Note Regardless of the actual size of the password, the Password and Confirm Password fields display only a fixed-length string. The fixed-length string is 12 asterisks (*).

---

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.3.2  Passive ONS 15216 NEs

The Network Element Properties pane for passive ONS 15216 NEs displays information specific to the passive EDFA, the passive OADM, the DCU, the OSC, and the DWDM ONS 15216 NEs. The passive ONS 15216 properties pane contains an Identification tab.

Table B-7 lists the different types of passive ONS 15216 NEs.

Table B-7 List of Passive ONS 15216 NE Types and Descriptions 

Passive ONS 15216 Types	Description
EDFA	Passive EDFA with no IP address or connectivity.
OADM	Passive 200-GHz OADM with no IP address or connectivity. The OADM can be either a 1- or 2-channel OADM.
DCU	Passive DCU with no IP address or connectivity.
OSC	Passive OSC with no IP address or connectivity.
DWDM	Passive DWDM filter with no IP address or connectivity. The DWDM filter can be a red, 200-GHz, DWDM filter; a blue, 200-GHz, DWDM filter; a red, 100-GHz, DWDM filter; or a blue, 100-GHz, DWDM filter.

B.3.2.1  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays the NE identification information.

Table B-8 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the selected NE.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15216).
NE Type	Displays the ONS 15216 NE type.
Vendor Name	Displays the vendor name. The default vendor name is Cisco Systems.
Version Name	Displays the name of the software version.
Location Name	Displays the geographic location of the selected NE.
Operational State	Displays the current operational state of the system: In Service, Under Maintenance, or Out of Service.
Subnetwork ID	Displays the name of the subnetwork associated with the selected NE.

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.3.3  ONS 15216 Passive DCU NE Explorer

The ONS 15216 Passive DCU NE Explorer displays information about the ONS 15216 Passive DCU NE. It contains Identification, Slot 1, and Slot 2 tabs. (See Figure B-3.)

Each slot can accommodate any one of the following modules:

•DCU-100 (100 ps/nm)

•DCU-350 (350 ps/nm)

•DCU-450 (450 ps/nm)

•DCU-550 (550 ps/nm)

•DCU-750 (750 ps/nm)

•DCU-950 (950 ps/nm)

•DCU-1150 (1150 ps/nm)

B.3.3.1  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays identification information for the ONS 15216 DCU NE.

Table B-9 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the ID of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
Description	Displays the description of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
NE Model	Displays the NE model type.
NE Type	Displays the type of NE.
NE Version	Displays the software version of the NE.
Product Name	Displays the name of the product.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the NE.
Location Name	Displays the name of the location where the NE is installed.
Subnetwork ID	Displays the ID of the subnetwork to which the NE belongs.
Network Partition ID	Displays the ID of the network partition.

B.3.3.2  Slot 1 and Slot 2 Tabs

The Slot 1 and Slot 2 tabs display information about the first and second slots. The fields in the tabs are identical, except that they pertain to different slots.

Table B-10 Field Descriptions for the Slot 1 and Slot 2 Tabs 

Field	Description
Module Type	Displays the NE model type. Select one of the following module types: DCU-100 (100 ps/nm), DCU-350 (350 ps/nm), DCU-450 (450 ps/nm), DCU-550 (550 ps/nm), DCU-750 (750ps/nm), DCU-950 (950 ps/nm), DCU-1150 (1150 ps/nm).
Product Name	Displays the name of the product.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the NE.

B.3.4  ONS 15216 DWDM NE Explorer

The NE Explorer for the ONS 15216 DWDM displays information about the passive ONS 15216 DWDM NE. It contains an Identification tab. (See Figure B-4.)

Figure B-4 NE Explorer—ONS 15216 DWDM

B.3.4.1  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays identification information about the ONS 15216 DWDM NE.

Table B-11 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the ID of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
Description	Displays the description of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
NE Model	Displays the NE model type.
NE Type	Displays the type of NE.
NE Version	Displays the software version of the NE.
Product Name	Displays the name of the product.
CLEI Code	Displays the Common Language Equipment Identification (CLEI) code.
Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the NE.
Location Name	Displays the name of the location where the NE is installed.
Subnetwork ID	Displays the ID of the subnetwork to which the NE belongs.
Network Partition ID	Displays the ID of the network partition.

B.3.5  ONS 15216 FlexLayer NE Explorer

The ONS 15216 FlexLayer NE Explorer displays information about the ONS 15216 FlexLayer NE. It contains Identification and Slot tabs. (See Figure B-5.)

Figure B-5 NE Explorer—ONS 15216 FlexLayer

B.3.5.1  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays identification information about the ONS 15216 FlexLayer NE.

Table B-12 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the ID of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
Description	Displays the description of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
NE Model	Displays the NE model type.
NE Type	Displays the type of NE.
NE Version	Displays the software version of the NE.
Product Name	Displays the name of the product.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the NE.
Location Name	Displays the name of the location where the NE is installed.
Subnetwork ID	Displays the ID of the subnetwork to which the NE belongs.
Network Partition ID	Displays the ID of the network partition.

B.3.5.2  Slot 1 Through Slot 4 Tabs

The Slot tabs show module information pertaining to the selected ONS 15216 FlexLayer NE slot. The fields in the tabs are identical, except that they pertain to different slots.

Table B-13 Field Descriptions for the Slot 1 through Slot 4 Tabs 

Field	Description
Module Type	Displays the type of module in the slot.
Product Name	Displays the name of the product.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the NE.

B.3.6  ONS 15216 Passive EDFA NE Explorer

The ONS 15216 Passive EDFA NE Explorer displays information about the ONS 15216 Passive EDFA NE. It contains an Identification tab.

B.3.6.1  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays identification information for the ONS 15216 Passive EDFA NE.

Table B-14 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the ID of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
Description	Displays the description of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
NE Model	Displays the NE model type.
NE Type	Displays the type of NE.
NE Version	Displays the software version of the NE.
Product Name	Displays the name of the product.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the NE.
Location Name	Displays the name of the location where the NE is installed.
Subnetwork ID	Displays the ID of the subnetwork to which the NE belongs.
Network Partition ID	Displays the ID of the network partition.

B.3.7  ONS 15216 Active EDFA2 NE Explorer

The ONS 15216 EDFA2 NE Explorer displays information about the ONS 15216 EDFA2 NE. (See Figure B-6.)

Figure B-6 NE Explorer—ONS 15216 EDFA2

The ONS 15216 EDFA2 NE Explorer contains the following tabs, some of which apply only to a specific NE version:

•Identification Tab

•Address Tab

•Config/Status Tab

•Diagnostics Tab

•Thresholds Tab

•Alarm Behavior Tab

•SNMP Tab

B.3.7.1  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays identification information about the ONS 15216 EDFA2 NEs.

Table B-15 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the ID of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
Description	Displays the description of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
NE Model	Displays the NE model type.
NE Type	Displays the type of NE.
NE Version	Displays the software version of the NE.
Wavelength(s)	Displays the number of wavelengths for the NE. This field is not applicable to the active EDFA NE type.
Product Name	Displays the name of the product.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the NE.
Location Name	Displays the name of the location where the NE is installed.
Location
Latitude	Allows you to set the latitude in the database. Select North or South from the drop-down list; then, enter the degrees and minutes (or click the up and down arrows to increase or decrease each by 1 unit).
Longitude	Allows you to set the longitude in the database. Select East or West from the drop-down list; then, enter the degrees and minutes (or click the up and down arrows to increase or decrease each by 1 unit).
Date and Time
Time	Displays the NE date and time.
Time Zone	Displays the time zone where the NE is located.
Use Daylight Savings Time	If checked, Daylight Savings Time is observed.

B.3.7.2  Address Tab

The Address tab displays information about the NE network address.

Table B-16 Field Descriptions for the Address Tab 

Field	Description
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the NE.
Subnet Mask	Displays the subnetwork mask ID of the NE.
Gateway Address	Displays the gateway address of the NE.
SNMP Community String	Displays the SNMP community string of the NE. You can edit this field.
GNE ID	Displays the GNE ID.
Subnetwork ID	Displays the ID of the subnetwork to which the NE belongs.
Network Partition ID	Displays the ID of the network partition.

B.3.7.3  Config/Status Tab

The Config/Status tab displays the configuration settings and status of the EDFA2.

Table B-17 Field Descriptions for the Config/Status Tab 

Field	Description
Overall
Overall Gain	Displays the value of the gain set point in dB when the mode is GAINTEMP (gets cerent15216EdfaConstGainOverallGainMeasured). Must be an integer from 13.0 to 22.0.
Measured Gain	Displays the measured overall gain in dB. The range is from 0.0 to 23.0. Note If there is no input power, this field reports a negative (invalid) value.
Pre-Attenuation	Displays the gain preattenuation value in dB (gets cerent15216EdfaVariableGainPreAttenuationMeasured). Must be an integer from 0.0 to 11.0.
Input Power	Displays the EDFA2 input power. Must be an integer from -9999.99 to 9999.99.
Output Power	Displays the EDFA2 output power. Must be an integer from -999.99 to 999.99.
DC Power Bus Mode	Displays the power bus mode setting (Simplex or Duplex) and allows you to change the mode.
Auto Laser Shutdown	Allows you to enable (On) or disable (Off) auto laser shutdown for the EDFA2. Note The auto laser shutdown feature is available for the ONS 15216 EDFA2 R2.4 and later.
Pump
Control Mode Setting	Displays the control mode of the laser pumps. Constant gain is achieved by using an automatic control circuit that adjusts pump power when changes in input power are detected. The ONS 15216 EDFA2 operates in Constant Gain Temperature Compensated mode by default, but since there might be applications where other operating modes are required, the ONS 15216 EDFA2 can be set to operate in any one the following pump control modes: •Constant Gain Temperature Compensated mode (ConstGainTempComp; Cisco default). •Constant Output Power mode (ConstOutputPower). Note Pump 1 cannot be set to ConstOutputPower mode. •Constant Pump Current mode (ConstCurrent). •Constant Pump Power mode (ConstPower). •Idle—Laser pumps can be shut down using the Idle control mode. Caution Use the pump control modes Constant Output Power, Constant Pump Current, and Constant Pump Power with extreme caution. These modes are service affecting and can reduce the lifecycle of the lasers if used in extreme conditions. The factory default setting and the recommended mode of operation is Constant Gain Temperature Compensated mode. It is recommended that you contact the Cisco TAC before changing from this mode of operation.
Actual Control Mode	Displays the actual control mode of the laser pumps.
Constant Pump Current	Displays the laser pump constant pump current in milliamperes (mA). This is the current used when the control mode is changed to constCurrent. When changing Pump 1, Pump 2 is changed automatically when the Apply button is clicked.
Constant Pump Power	Displays the constant pump power in milliwatts (mW). The range is from 0 to 100 mW; the Cisco default is 0. You must set the constant power of pump 1 and pump 2 at the same time.
Constant Output Power	Displays the constant output power in mW. Only Pump2 is writeable. When ConstOutputPower is selected as the control mode, this field is enabled and editable for Pump2 and not for Pump1. The Const Power field is enabled with the Cisco default value (0). The range is from 0.0 to 65.0 mW.

B.3.7.4  Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostics tab allows you to view NE laser pump attributes.

Table B-18 Field Descriptions for the Diagnostics Tab 

Field	Description
Gain Module Temp	Displays the gain module temperature in degrees Celsius. Must be an integer from -99.99 to 99.99.
Gain Module Volt	Displays the gain module voltage in volts. Must be an integer from 0 to 999.
Input Power	Displays the laser input power in dBm. Must be an integer from -9999.99 to 9999.99.
Output Power	Displays the laser output power in dBm. Must be an integer from -999.99 to 999.99.
Gain	Displays the laser gain in dB. Must be an integer from -999.9 to 999.9.
Pump
Chip Temp	Displays the chip temperature in degrees Celsius. Must be an integer from -999.9 to 999.9.
Chip Temp Set Pt.	Displays the chip temperature set point in degrees Celsius. Must be an integer from 0.0 to 99.9.
TEC Current	Displays the TEC current in mA. Must be an integer from 0 to 99999.
Current	Displays the laser current in mA. Must be an integer from 0 to 999.
Power	Displays the pump power in mW. Must be an integer from 0.0 to 999.99.

B.3.7.5  Thresholds Tab

The Thresholds tab displays the threshold settings of the EDFA2.

Table B-19 Field Descriptions for the Thresholds Tab 

Field	Description
Input Power
Threshold	Displays the input power threshold value in dBm. Must be an integer from -31 to -15.
Hysteresis	Displays the input power hysteresis value in dB. Must be an integer from 0 to 10.
Input Power	Displays the input power threshold value. Must be an integer from -9999.99 to 9999.99.
Output Power
Alm Deviation	Displays the output power alarm deviation value in dB. Must be an integer from 0 to 10.
Alm Hysteresis	Displays the output power alarm hysteresis value in dB. Must be an integer from 0 to 10.
Output Power Setpt	Displays the output power setpoint threshold value.
Gain
Min Gain	Displays the minimum gain setting. Must be an integer from -999.99 to 999.99.
Max Gain	Displays the maximum gain setting. Must be an integer from -999.99 to 999.99.
Measured Gain	Displays the value of the gain in dB when the mode is GAINTEMP (gets cerent15216EdfaConstGainOverallGainMeasured). Must be an integer from 0 to 23.
Gain Module Temperature
Min Temperature	Displays the minimum case temperature in degrees Celsius. Must be an integer from -10 to 10.
Max Temperature	Displays the maximum case temperature in degrees Celsius. Must be an integer from 20 to 70.
Min Hysteresis	Displays the minimum case temperature hysteresis in degrees Celsius. Must be an integer from 0 to 10.
Max Hysteresis	Displays the maximum case temperature hysteresis in degrees Celsius. Must be an integer from 0 to 10.
Power Bus
Power Bus Min	Displays the minimum allowable power bus DC voltage. Must be an integer from -70 to -35.
Power Bus Max	Displays the maximum allowable power bus DC voltage. Must be an integer from -70 to -35.
Laser 1 Current
Out-of-Range	Displays the Laser 1 pump temperature that is out of range.
Current	Displays the current of the Laser 1 pump in mA.
Laser 2 Current
Out-of-Range	Displays the Laser 2 pump temperature that is out of range.
Current	Displays the current of the Laser 2 pump in mA.
Laser 1 Temperature
Temp Min	Displays the minimum temperature of Laser 1.
Temp Max	Displays the maximum temperature of Laser 1.
Chip Temp	Displays the Laser 1 chip temperature in degrees Celsius. Must be an integer from -999.99 to 999.99.
Laser 2 Temperature
Temp Min	Displays the minimum temperature of Laser 2.
Temp Max	Displays the maximum temperature of Laser 2.
Chip Temp	Displays the Laser 2 chip temperature in degrees Celsius. Must be an integer from -999.99 to 999.99.

B.3.7.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab allows you to enter, save, view, and update NE fault management attributes.

Table B-20 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Probable Cause	Displays the probable cause of the alarm.
Severity	Displays the alarm severity (Critical, Major, Minor, Informational, or Not Alarmed). Note If two minor power bus alarms are generated, the second alarm is escalated to critical in the Alarm Browser window. If the alarm severity is changed to another value, the alarm remains critical due to the power bus escalation feature, which overrides the alarm severity provisioning for power bus alarms.

B.3.7.7  SNMP Tab

The SNMP tab displays the settings for the SNMP Community table, the Trap Destination table, and SNMP views. The SNMP tab contains the following subtabs: SNMP Community Table, Trap Destination Table, and SNMP Views.

Table B-21 Field Descriptions for the SNMP Tab 

Field	Description
SNMP Community Table
Community Name	Displays the SNMP community name.
View Index	Displays the view index that specifies which MIBs that the community string can access.
Privileges	Displays the bitmap of access privilege that govern what management operations a particular community can perform. These privileges are expressed as a sum of values, where each value represents a particular operation. The decimal values and their respective SNMP operation are: •1—Get •2—GetNext •4—Response (enabled for all community strings) •8—Set •16—SNMPv1-Trap •32—GetBulk •64—Inform (enabled for all community strings) •128—SNMPv2-Trap (enabled for all community strings) For example, 255 is the sum of all decimal values and specifies access to all SNMP operations. This sum is the default private community. 247 is the sum for all SNMP operations with the exception of the Set operation. This sum is the default public community. Use the buttons in the Privileges column to set privilege values. In the Privilege Editor dialog box, check the check boxes that correspond to the privileges that you want to set. After making your selections, click OK. CTM computes the bit value automatically.
IP Address	Displays the source IP address.
Subnet Mask	Displays the subnet mask for the source IP address.
Status	Displays the community string status. Values are: •Active •Not in Service •Not Ready •Create and Go •Create and Wait •Destroy
Trap Destination Table
IP Address	Displays the trap destination IP address.
UDP Port	Displays the trap destination UDP port.
Community Name	Displays the trap destination community string.
Version	Displays the trap version number.
View Index	Displays the trap destination MIB view index.
Status	Displays the community string status. Values are: •Active •Not in Service •Not ready •Create and Go •Create and Wait •Destroy
SNMP Trap Enable check box	If checked, allows you to enable SNMP traps on the NE. Note This is a global setting, meaning all users are affected by a change to this setting.
SNMP Views
View Index	Displays the view index number, which is a unique value for each MIB view.
Subtree	Displays an object identifier that designates a subtree element in the MIB hierarchy.
Mask	Displays a bit mask that identifies objects in the subtree.
Type	Displays a flag that specifies the status of the view. Valid entries are included and excluded.
Status	Indicates the status of the SNMP view entry. If the entry currently exists, the status is active.

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.3.8  ONS 15216 Active EDFA3 NE Explorer

The ONS 15216 EDFA3 NE Explorer displays information about the ONS 15216 EDFA3 NE. (See Figure B-7.)

Figure B-7 NE Explorer—ONS 15216 EDFA3

The ONS 15216 EDFA3 NE Explorer contains the following tabs:

•Identification Tab

•Address Tab

•Config/Status Tab

•Diagnostics Tab

•Thresholds Tab

•Alarm Behavior Tab

•SNMP Tab

B.3.8.1  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays identification information for the ONS 15216 EDFA3 NE.

Table B-22 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the ID of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
Description	Displays the description of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
NE Model	Displays the NE model type.
NE Type	Displays the type of NE.
NE Version	Displays the software version of the NE.
Wavelength(s)	Displays the number of wavelengths for the NE. This field is not applicable to the active EDFA NE type.
Product Name	Displays the name of the product.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the NE.
Location Name	Displays the name of the location where the NE is installed.
NE Date and Time	Displays the date and time configured on the NE.
Location
Latitude	Allows you to set the latitude of the NE. Select North or South from the drop-down list; then, enter the degrees and minutes (or click the up and down arrows to increase or decrease each by 1 unit).
Longitude	Allows you to set the longitude of the NE. Select East or West from the drop-down list; then, enter the degrees and minutes (or click the up and down arrows to increase or decrease each by 1 unit).

B.3.8.2  Address Tab

The Address tab displays information about the NE network address.

Table B-23 Field Descriptions for the Address Tab 

Field	Description
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the NE.
Subnet Mask	Displays the subnetwork mask ID of the NE.
Gateway Address	Displays the gateway address of the NE.
SNMP Community String	Displays the SNMP community string of the NE. You can edit this field.
MAC Address	Displays the ONS 15216 EDFA3 address as it is identified on the IEEE 802 MAC layer.
GNE ID	Displays the GNE ID.
Subnetwork ID	Displays the ID of the subnetwork to which the NE belongs.
Network Partition ID	Displays the ID of the network partition.

B.3.8.3  Config/Status Tab

The Config/Status tab displays the configuration settings and status of the EDFA3 and lasers.

Table B-24 Field Descriptions for the Config/Status Tab 

Field	Description
Control Mode
Control Mode	Displays the amplifier control mode. Values are: •Constant Output Power •Constant Gain (Cisco default)
Gain
Gain	Displays the gain value. Values are integers from 0 to 40 dB.
Gain Setpoint	Displays the gain setpoint. The range is from 5.0 to 38.5 dB; the Cisco default is 21 dB.
Power
Laser 1 Output Power	Displays the amplifier output power related to laser 1. The range is from -60 to 25 dBm.
Power Setpoint	Displays the amplifier output power setpoint value. The range is from -7 to 17 dBm; the Cisco default is 10 dBm.
Amplifier Input Power	Displays the amplifier input power. The range is from -60 to 25 dBm.
Laser 2 Input Power	Displays the mid-stage access input power value related to laser 2. The range is from -60 to 25 dBm.
Amplifier Output Power	Displays the mid-stage access output power value. The range is from -60 to 25 dBm.
Power Offset	Displays the output power offset. The range is from -20 to 20 dBm; the Cisco default is 0.
Tilt
Tilt	Displays the tilt value. The range is from -15 to 15 dB.
Tilt Setpoint	Displays the tilt setpoint. The range is from -15 to 15 dB; the Cisco default is 0 dB.
Tilt Offset	Displays the tilt offset. The range is from -20 to 20 dB; the Cisco default is 0 dB.
Laser
Laser Status	Displays the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) status. Values are: •On—Lasers are on •APR—Lasers are in the automatic power reduction state •Off—Lasers are off
OSRI	Displays the OSRI. Values are: •On—Laser switch is locked on •Off—(Cisco default) There is no lock on the lasers
DC Power Bus Mode
DC Power Bus Mode	Displays the power bus mode: Simplex or Duplex.

B.3.8.4  Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostics tab displays diagnostics information for the EDFA3 and lasers.

Table B-25 Field Descriptions for the Diagnostics Tab 

Field	Description
DCU Insertion Loss	Displays the insertion loss of the DCU inserted in mid-stage. The range is from 0 to 20 dB.
VOA Value	Displays the VOA value. The range is from -100 to 100 dB.
Laser Bias
Laser 1 Bias	Displays the laser 1 bias. The range is from 0 to 150 mA.
Laser 2 Bias	Displays the laser 2 bias. The range is from 0 to 150 mA.
Temperatures
Case Temperature	Displays the case temperature. The range is from -100 to 150 degrees Celsius.
Fiber Temperature	Displays the fiber temperature. The range is from -100 to 150 degrees Celsius.
Pump 1 Temperature	Displays the pump 1 temperature. The range is from -100 to 150 degrees Celsius.
Pump 2 Temperature	Displays the pump 2 temperature. The range is from -100 to 150 degrees Celsius.
Bus Voltages
Bus A Voltage	Displays the power bus A voltage. The range is from 0 to 999 V.
Bus B Voltage	Displays the power bus B voltage. The range is from 0 to 999 V.

B.3.8.5  Thresholds Tab

The Thresholds tab displays the threshold settings of the EDFA3.

Table B-26 Field Descriptions for the Thresholds Tab 

Field	Description
Gain
Degrade High	Displays the degrade high threshold associated with the amplifier gain. The range is from 0 to 40 dB.
Degrade Low	Displays the degrade low threshold associated with the amplifier gain. The range is from 0 to 40 dB.
Gain	Displays the gain value. The range is from 0 to 40 dB.
Line 1 Tx Power
Degrade High	Displays the degrade high threshold associated with the amplifier output power related to the Line 1 Tx port. The range is from 0 to 40 dB.
Degrade Low	Displays the degrade low threshold associated with the amplifier output power related to the Line 1 Tx port. The range is from 0 to 40 dB.
Line 1 Output Power	Displays the amplifier output power related to the Line 1 Tx port. The range is from -60 to 25 dBm.
Fail Low	Displays the fail low threshold associated with the output power value related to the Line 1 Tx port. The range is from -10 to 14 dBm; the Cisco default is -6 dBm.
Line 1 Rx Power
Amplifier Input Power	Displays the amplifier input power value related to the Line 1 Rx port. The range is from -60 to 25 dBm.
Fail Low	Displays the fail low threshold associated with the input power value related to the Line 1 Rx port. The range is from -49 to 13 dBm; the Cisco default is 10 dBm.
Line 2 Rx Power
Laser 2 Input Power	Displays the mid-stage access input power value related to the Line 1 Rx port. The range is from -60 to 25 dBm.
Fail Low	Displays the fail low threshold associated with the mid-stage access input power related to the Line 2 Rx port. The range is from -49 to 15 dBm; the Cisco default is -33 dBm.
Gain Module Temperature
Temperature Max	Displays the maximum allowable case temperature threshold. The range is from 60 to 100 degrees Celsius; the Cisco default is 65 degrees Celsius.
Temperature Min	Displays the minimum allowable case temperature threshold. The range is from -10 to 30 degrees Celsius; the Cisco default is -5 degrees Celsius.
Case Temperature	Displays the case temperature. The range is from -100 to 150.
Bus Voltage
Bus Voltage Max	Displays the power bus A and B maximum voltage. The range is from 49 to 70 V; the Cisco default is 57 V.
Bus Voltage Min	Displays the power bus A and B minimum voltage. The range is from 0 to 47 V; the Cisco default is 40 V.
Bus A Voltage	Displays the power bus A voltage. The range is from 0.0 to 999.9 V.
Bus B Voltage	Displays the power bus B voltage. The range is from 0.0 to 999.9 V.

B.3.8.6  Alarm Behavior Tab

The Alarm Behavior tab allows you to enter, save, view, and update NE fault management attributes.

Table B-27 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Tab 

Field	Description
Probable Cause	Displays the possible causes of the alarm.
Severity	Displays the alarm severity (Critical, Major, Minor, or Not Alarmed) and whether the alarm is service affecting (SA) or nonservice affecting (NSA).

B.3.8.7  SNMP Tab

The SNMP tab displays information about the SNMP Trap Destination table. Click Add Row to create a new trap destination; click Delete Row to delete an existing trap destination.

Table B-28 Field Descriptions for the SNMP Tab 

Field	Description
IP Address	Displays the SNMP IP address.
UDP Port Number	Displays the trap destination UDP port.
Community Name	Displays the trap destination community name.
Version	Displays the SNMP version number.

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.3.9  ONS 15216 Active OADM NE Explorer

The ONS 15216 OADM NE Explorer displays information about the ONS 15216 100-GHz OADM NE. (See Figure B-8.)

Figure B-8 NE Explorer—ONS 15216 100-GHz OADM

The ONS 15216 100-GHz OADM NE Explorer contains the following tabs:

•Identification Tab

•Address Tab

•DWDM Tab

•Alarms Tab

•Thresholds Tab

B.3.9.1  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays identification information for the ONS 15216 100-GHz OADM NE.

Table B-29 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the ID of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
Description	Displays the description of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
NE Model	Displays the NE model type.
NE Type	Displays the type of NE.
NE Version	Displays the software version of the NE.
Wavelength(s)	Displays the number of wavelengths for this NE.
Product Name	Displays the name of the product.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the NE.
Location Name	Displays the name of the location where the NE is installed.
NE Date and Time	Displays the date and time when the NE was installed.

B.3.9.2  Address Tab

The Address tab displays information about the NE network address.

Table B-30 Field Descriptions for the Address Tab 

Field	Description
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the NE.
Subnet Mask	Displays the subnetwork mask ID of the NE. If the field does not apply to the NE, the label is grayed out and the value reads Not Applicable.
Gateway Address	Displays the gateway address of the NE. If the field does not apply to the NE, the label is grayed out and the value reads Not Applicable.
SNMP Community String	Displays the SNMP community string of the NE. If the field does not apply to the NE, the label is grayed out and the value reads Not Applicable.
GNE ID	Displays the GNE ID.
Subnetwork ID	Displays the ID of the subnetwork to which the NE belongs.
Network Partition ID	Displays the ID of the network partition associated with the selected NE.

B.3.9.3  DWDM Tab

The DWDM tab allows you to view, enter, update, and save the NE DWDM attributes.

Table B-31 Field Descriptions for the DWDM Tab 

Field	Description
Channel Number	Displays the channels that can be added or dropped. Values are: •1-channel—West 1, East 1 •2-channel—West 1, East 1, West 2, East 2 •4-channel—West 1, East 1, West 2, East 2, West 3, East 3, West 4, East 4
Mode	Allows you to configure the NE DWDM mode. Values are: •Setpoint (Cisco default)—The add channel power is set to the value of the Default Add Channel Power. Although the Default Add Channel Power can be set in any configuration, the add channel power is only equal to the Default Add Channel Power value in this mode. •Off—To turn off an add channel, set the channel power to a very low value (for example, -35 dBm). No alarm will be triggered. •Disable—When an add/drop channel is not in use, the channel should be configured in DISBABLE mode where no alarms will be triggered.
Default Add Channel Power	Displays the default power of the added channel in dBm. It is only available if you select Setpoint as the mode. Values must be from -29.0 to 3.0 in increments of 0.1.
InsLossAdd	Shows the calculated insertion loss for the add channel.
InsLossDrop	Shows the calculated insertion loss for the drop channel.
InsLossXpress	Shows the calculated insertion loss for the express/through channels.
Calculated Setpoint (CALCSETP)	The CALCSETP feature of the ONS 15216 OADM is a calculated value, and represents the OADMs recommended optical power level setting for a particular add channel. Following this recommendation when selecting the setpoint value for a particular add channel will allow the composite outgoing signal (composed of express channels and newly added channels) to be as flat as possible. The formula used for this calculation is CALCSETP = PWRDROP + ILDROP - ILTHRU.

B.3.9.4  Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab allows you to enter, save, view, and update NE dropped channel signal loss alarm attributes.

Table B-32 Field Descriptions for the Alarms Tab 

Field	Description
Channel Number	Displays the channels that can be added or dropped. Values are: •1-channel—West 1, East 1 •2-channel—West 1, East 1, West 2, East 2 •4-channel—West 1, East 1, West 2, East 2, West 3, East 3, West 4, East 4
Drop Channel Signal Loss Alarm	Displays the current condition of the drop channel signal loss alarm. Values are: •On—Enables the loss signal alarm of the drop channel. •Off—Disables the loss signal alarm of the drop channel.

B.3.9.5  Thresholds Tab

The Thresholds tab allows you to enter, save, view, and update NE loss of signal and add/drop channel signal mismatch threshold attributes.

Table B-33 Field Descriptions for the Thresholds Tab 

Field	Description
Channel Number	Displays the channels that can be added or dropped. Values are: •1-channel—West 1, East 1 •2-channel—West 1, East 1, West 2, East 2 •4-channel—West 1, East 1, West 2, East 2, West 3, East 3, West 4, East 4
Loss of Signal	Displays the signal loss threshold value. Valid values are -30.0 to 3.5 dBm in increments of 0.1 dBm.
Drop and Add Signal Mismatch	Displays the threshold value for the drop channel signal loss alarm. Valid values are 0.2 to 2.0 dB in increments of 0.1 dB. The Cisco default is 1.0 dB.

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.3.10  ONS 15216 Passive OADM NE Explorer

The ONS 15216 Passive OADM NE Explorer displays information about the ONS 15216 passive OADM NE. It contains an Identification tab.

B.3.10.1  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays identification information for the ONS 15216 passive OADM NE.

Table B-34 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the ID of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
Description	Displays the description of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
NE Model	Displays the NE model type.
NE Type	Displays the type of NE.
NE Version	Displays the software version of the NE.
Wavelength(s)	Displays the number of wavelengths for this NE.
Product Name	Displays the name of the product. Displays 15216-MD16-2-BLUE for the blue version and 15216-MD16-2-RED for the red version. Displays Unknown if the product name is not known. Note The information displayed in the Product Name field depends on the wavelength selected.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code. Displays WMMFD00BRA for the blue version and WMMFE00BRA for the red version. Displays Unknown if the CLEI code is not known. Note The information displayed in the CLEI Code field depends on the wavelength selected.
Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the NE. You can edit this field.
Location Name	Displays the name of the location where the NE is installed. You can edit this field.
Subnetwork ID	Displays the ID of the subnetwork to which the NE belongs.
Network Partition ID	Displays the ID of the network partition to which the NE belongs.

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.3.11  ONS 15216 OSC Passive NE Explorer

The ONS 15216 Passive OSC NE Explorer displays information about the ONS 15216 passive OSC NE. It contains an Identification tab.

B.3.11.1  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays the identification information for the ONS 15216 passive OSC NE.

Table B-35 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the ID of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
Description	Displays the description of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
NE Model	Displays the NE model type.
NE Type	Displays the type of NE.
NE Version	Displays the software version of the NE.
Wavelength(s)	Displays the number of wavelengths for this NE.
Product Name	Displays the name of the product.
CLEI Code	Displays the CLEI code.
Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the NE. You can edit this field.
Location Name	Displays the name of the location where the NE is installed. You can edit this field.
Subnetwork ID	Displays the ID of the subnetwork to which the NE belongs.
Network Partition ID	Displays the ID of the network partition.

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.4  ONS 15302 and ONS 15305

The NE Explorer is not available for the ONS 15302 and ONS 15305. Equivalent functionality is provided through launching Cisco Edge Craft from CTM; choose Configuration > ONS 15302 or ONS 15305 > Launch Cisco Edge Craft. (See Figure B-9.)

Figure B-9 Cisco Edge Craft for the ONS 15305

B.5  ONS 15310 CL NE Explorer

When you choose Configuration > NE Explorer for the ONS 15310, the window displayed by CTM consists of a tree on the left side and a properties pane on the right. (See Figure B-10). The tree provides a hierarchical view and alarm status of the NE's physical shelves and slots. The properties pane shows information about the selected entity (NE or slot). See Node Properties Pane—ONS 15310 CL for more information.

Figure B-10 ONS 15310 CL NE Explorer

---

Note If CTC is launched from the web browser for an ONS 15310 node, the CTC GUI might look different from when it is launched from CTM. This discrepancy occurs because the latest version of CTC (for NE releases supported by CTM) is packaged with CTM. If launched from a browser, the CTC software is retrieved from the NE itself, which might be a version different from that packaged with CTM.

---

When an NE Explorer is in autorefresh mode, all values of an entity that is being edited by the user are automatically refreshed. You will lose all of your changes unless you click the Apply button. To enable autorefresh, click the Refresh Data button in the NE Explorer.

B.5.1  Node Properties Pane—ONS 15310 CL

The node properties pane displays information about the ONS 15310 slot that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Use this properties pane to change the module performance monitoring thresholds.

•Shelf View Tab

•Identification Tab

•Network Tab

•DCC Tab

•Timing Tab

•Protection Tab

•NE Defaults Tab

•Security Tab

•Alarm Tab

•XC Utilization Tab

•OSI Tab

B.5.1.1  Shelf View Tab

The Shelf View tab displays a graphic of the ONS 15310 that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic of the NE, its shelves, slots, or cards displays the current alarms for the shelf, slot, or card. Double-clicking a slot or card displays the slot or card in the properties pane. The right-click menu allows you to reset or delete the card. For unprovisioned slots, the right-click menu allows you to add a card.

B.5.1.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays information about the NE.

Table B-36 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the ID of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
Description	Displays the description of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
NE Model	Displays the NE model type.
Software Version	Displays the current running version of the system software.
Contact	Displays the name of the node contact person and the phone number.
System Description	Displays a description of the NE.
SNTP Settings
Use NTP/SNTP Server	If checked, CTC uses a Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) server to set the date and time of the node. Using an SNTP server ensures that all ONS 15310 network nodes use the same date and time reference. The server synchronizes the node's time after power outages or software upgrades. If you check the Use NTP/SNTP Server check box, enter the server's IP address in the next field. If you do not use an SNTP server, complete the Time and Time Zone fields. The ONS 15310 will use these fields for alarm dates and times.
SNTP Server	Displays the SNTP server IP address.
Location
Latitude	Allows you to set the latitude of the NE. Select North or South from the drop-down list; then, enter the degrees and minutes (or click the up and down arrows to increase or decrease each by 1 unit).
Longitude	Allows you to set the longitude of the NE. Select East or West from the drop-down list; then, enter the degrees and minutes (or click the up and down arrows to increase or decrease each by 1 unit).
Date and Time
Time	Displays the NE date and time.
Time Zone	Displays the time zone where the NE is located.
Use Daylight Savings Time	If checked, Daylight Savings Time is observed.
AIS-V Insertion on STS-1 Signal Degrade - Path
Insert AIS-V on STS-1 SD-P	If checked, the NE inserts an AIS-V signal when it detects an STS-1 signal degrade.
SD-P BER	Select the signal degrade path bit error rate for AIS-V insertion.

B.5.1.3  Network Tab

The Network tab displays information about the NE network address. The Network tab contains the following subtabs:

•Address Subtab

•Static Routes Subtab

•OSPF Subtab

•OSPF Area Range Subtab

•OSPF Virtual Links Subtab

•SNMP Subtab

•Firewall/Proxy Subtab

•RIP Routing Table Subtab

•RIP Subtab

•Routing Table Subtab

•Proxy Tunnels Subtab

•Firewall Tunnels Subtab

B.5.1.3.1  Address Subtab

The Address subtab allows you to view and change information about the NE network address.

Table B-37 Field Descriptions for the Address Subtab 

Field	Description
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the NE.
Default Router	Displays the IP address of the default router.
Subnet Mask	Displays the subnetwork mask ID of the NE.
MAC Address	Displays the ONS 15310 address as it is identified on the IEEE 802 MAC layer.
Forward DHCP Requests	If checked, forwards Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) requests to the IP address entered in the DHCP Server field. When the Forward DHCP Requests check box is unchecked, the field is read-only.
DHCP Server	Displays the IP address of the DHCP server.

B.5.1.3.2  Static Routes Subtab

The Static Routes subtab allows you to view information about CTM and ONS 15310 connectivity and create or delete static routes.

Table B-38 Field Descriptions for the Static Routes Subtab 

Field	Description
Destination IP	Displays the IP address of the computer running CTM.
Subnet Mask	Displays the subnetwork mask.
Next Hop	Displays the IP address of the router port or the node IP address if the CTM computer is connected to the node directly.
Cost	Displays the number of hops between the ONS 15310 and the computer.

B.5.1.3.3  OSPF Subtab

The OSPF subtab displays Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) information. OSPF is a link state Internet routing protocol.

Table B-39 Field Descriptions for the OSPF Subtab 

Field	Description
Slot	Displays the slot number.
Port	Displays the port number.
DCC OSPF Area ID	Displays the number that identifies the ONS 15310s as a unique OSPF area. The OSPF area number can be from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The number must be unique to the LAN OSPF area.
SDCC Metric	Sets a cost for sending packets across the Section Data Communications Channel (SDCC), which is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. This value should always be higher than the LAN metric. The Cisco default metric is 100. This value is normally unchanged.
OSPF Active on LAN	If checked, enables ONS 15310 OSPF topology to be advertised to OSPF routers on the LAN. Enable this field on ONS 15310s that directly connect to OSPF routers.
LAN Port Area ID	Displays the OSPF area ID for the router port where the ONS 15310 is connected. (This number is different from the DCC OSPF Area ID.)
Router Priority	Displays the designated router for a subnet.
Dead Interval	Displays the number of seconds that will pass while an OSPF router's packets are not visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the Cisco default.
Retransmit Interval	Displays the time that will elapse before a packet is resent. Five seconds is the Cisco default.
Hello Interval	Displays the number of seconds between OSPF hello packet advertisements sent by OSPF routers. Ten seconds is the Cisco default.
Transit Delay	Displays the service speed. One second is the Cisco default.
LAN Metric	Displays a cost for sending packets across the LAN. This value should always be lower than the DCC metric. Ten is the Cisco default.
Authentication Type	Displays Simple Password if the router where the ONS 15310 is connected uses authentication. Otherwise, it displays No Authentication.
Authentication Key	Displays the OSPF key (password) if authentication is enabled.
Confirm Authentication Key	Retype the authentication key to confirm it.

B.5.1.3.4  OSPF Area Range Subtab

The OSPF Area Range subtab allows you to view information about OSPF area ranges and create or delete area ranges.

Table B-40 Field Descriptions for the OSPF Area Range Subtab 

Field	Description
Range Address	Displays the area IP address for the ONS 15310s that reside within the OSPF area. For example, if the ONS 15310 OSPF area includes nodes with IP addresses 10.10.20.100, 10.10.30.150, 10.10.40.200, and 10.10.50.250, the range address would be 10.10.0.0.
Range Area ID	Displays the OSPF area ID for the ONS 15310. This is either the ID in the DCC OSPF Area ID field or the ID in the Area ID for LAN Port field.
Mask Length	Displays the subnet mask length.
Mask	Displays the subnet mask IP address.
Advertise	Indicates whether the OSPF range table is advertised.

B.5.1.3.5  OSPF Virtual Links Subtab

The OSPF Virtual Links subtab allows you to view information about OSPF virtual links and create or delete virtual links.

---

Note You cannot create a new virtual link unless OSPF is active on the LAN.

---

Table B-41 Field Descriptions for the OSPF Virtual Links Subtab 

Field	Description
Neighbor	Displays the router ID of the Area 0 router.
Transit Delay (sec)	Displays the service speed. One second is the Cisco default.
Retransmit Interval (sec)	Displays the time that will elapse before a packet is resent. Five seconds is the Cisco default.
Hello Interval (sec)	Displays the number of seconds between OSPF hello packet advertisements sent by OSPF routers. Ten seconds is the Cisco default.
Dead Interval (sec)	Displays the number of seconds that will pass while the packets of an OSPF router are not visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the Cisco default.
Authentication Type	Displays the authentication type.
Authentication Key	Displays the authentication key.

B.5.1.3.6  SNMP Subtab

The SNMP subtab allows you to view SNMP information and create or delete SNMP trap destinations.

Table B-42 Field Descriptions for the SNMP Subtab 

Field	Description
Allow SNMP Set	If checked, allows you to use SNMP management software with the ONS 15310.
Allow SNMP Proxy	If checked, allows you to configure the ONS 15310 to proxy SNMP calls.
IP Address	The IP address of the NMS.
Community Name	The SNMP community name. Note The SNMP community string cannot be blank in CTM. If a blank community string is required in CTC builds earlier than R4.6, you must set the blank community string in CTC.
UDP Port	The UDP port for SNMP. The Cisco default UDP port is 162.
Trap Version	The trap version, either SNMP version 1 or version 2. See your NMS documentation to determine whether to use SNMP version 1 or version 2.
Relay A IP Address	The first ONS 15310 to relay traps through. The IP address is appended to the base community string (to tell the first NE that is relaying the trap), the IP address, and port to forward the trap to. The second NE recognizes the IP address and strips it from the community string before forwarding the trap.
Relay A Community Name	The community name for the relay A node to use in the trap when forwarding it.
Relay B IP Address	The second ONS 15310 to relay traps through.
Relay B Community Name	The community name for the relay B node to use in the trap when forwarding it.
Relay C IP Address	The third ONS 15310 to relay traps through.
Relay C Community Name	The community name for the relay C node to use in the trap when forwarding it.

B.5.1.3.7  Firewall/Proxy Subtab

The Firewall/Proxy subtab allows you to use an NE as a proxy server or as a firewall.

Table B-43 Field Descriptions for the Firewall/Proxy Subtab 

Field	Description
Gateway Settings
Enable Proxy Server on Port	If checked, the ONS 15310 serves as a proxy for connections between the CTM server and ONS 15310s that are DCC-connected to the proxy ONS 15310. The CTM server establishes connections to DCC-connected nodes through the proxy node. The CTM server can connect to nodes that it cannot directly reach from the host on which it runs. The proxy server port number (read-only) is displayed following the Enable Proxy Server on Port field. The proxy server uses port number 1080. If checked, the following radio buttons are enabled: •External Network Element (ENE)—Enables the ONS 15310 to proxy as an ENE. Note that an alternate expansion for ENE is end network element. •Gateway Network Element (GNE)—Enables the ONS 15310 to proxy as a GNE. •Proxy-only—Enables proxy only. If unchecked, the node does not proxy.

B.5.1.3.8  RIP Routing Table Subtab

The RIP Routing Table subtab allows you to view the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) routing table.

Table B-44 Field Descriptions for the RIP Routing Table Subtab 

Field	Description
Destination	Displays the IP address of the destination network or host.
Mask	Displays the subnet mask used to reach the destination host or network.
Gateway	Displays the IP address of the gateway used to reach the destination network or host.
Cost	Displays the hop count metric. The valid range is from 1 to 15.

B.5.1.3.9  RIP Subtab

The RIP subtab allows you to view and configure RIP parameters.

---

Note When you enable RIP, you must wait for approximately one minute for the default RIP address summary to become visible.

---

---

Note When you disable RIP on the NE, all summary address entries in the Summary Address table will be deleted.

---

Table B-45 Field Descriptions for the RIP Subtab 

Field	Description
RIP Active	Enable or disable RIP.
RIP Type	Select RIP version 1.0 or RIP version 2.0.
Metric	Select the hop count metric. The valid range is from 1 to 15.
Authentication Type	Select the authentication type.
Authentication Key	Enter the authentication key (password) if the authentication type is Simple Password.
Confirm Authentication Key	Retype the authentication key to confirm it.
RIP Address Summary	•Summary Address—Displays the summary address. •Mask Length—Displays the subnet mask length. •Cost—Displays the hop count metric. The valid range is from 1 to 15.

B.5.1.3.10  Routing Table Subtab

The Routing Table subtab allows you to view the OSPF routing table.

Table B-46 Field Descriptions for the Routing Table Subtab 

Field	Description
Destination	Displays the IP address of the destination network or host.
Mask	Displays the subnet mask used to reach the destination host or network.
Gateway	Displays the IP address of the gateway used to reach the destination network or host.
Usage	Shows the number of times the listed route has been used.
Interface	Shows the ONS 15310 interface used to access the destination. Values are: •cpm0—The ONS 15310 Ethernet interface (that is, the RJ-45 jack on the TCC+/TCC2 and the LAN 1 pins on the backplane) •pdcc0—An SDCC interface (that is, an OC-N trunk card identified as the SDCC termination) •lo0—A loopback interface

B.5.1.3.11  Proxy Tunnels Subtab

The Proxy Tunnels subtab allows you to configure source and destination information for proxy tunnels.

Table B-47 Field Descriptions for the Proxy Tunnels Subtab 

Field	Description
Source Address	Specify the source IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.
Source Mask	Specify the source subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.
Destination Address	Specify the destination IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.
Destination Mask	Specify the destination subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.

B.5.1.3.12  Firewall Tunnels Subtab

The Firewall Tunnels subtab allows you to configure source and destination information for firewall tunnels.

Table B-48 Field Descriptions for the Firewall Tunnels Subtab 

Field	Description
Source Address	Specify the source IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.
Source Mask	Specify the source subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.
Destination Address	Specify the destination IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.
Destination Mask	Specify the destination subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.

B.5.1.4  DCC Tab

The DCC tab allows you to create, delete, and view SONET or SDH DCCs.

Table B-49 Field Descriptions for the DCC Tab 

Field	Description
SDCC
SDCC Terminations	Displays the slot, port, and card type of an SDCC termination.
OSPF Disabled on Link	Check to prevent the advertisement of the OSPF routing table.
Foreign	A check mark indicates that the far-end node is a non-ONS node.
Foreign IP	Displays the foreign node IP address.
LAPD Config	If the SDCC is provisioned as OSI only, the following SDCC LAP-D parameters are displayed: •AITS/UITS—Indicates the LAP-D acknowledgement type, either AITS (Acknowledged Information Transfer Service) or UITS (Unacknowledged Transfer Service). •Network/User—Indicates the LAP-D frame command/response role, either Network or User. •MTU—Shows the size of the maximum transfer unit (MTU). The range is from 512 to 1500 octets. •T2000—Shows the time between SABME (Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode) frame transmission. The range is from 0.2 to 20 seconds. •T203—Shows the maximum time between LAP-D frame exchanges. The range is from 4 to 120 seconds.
OSI SNPA	If the SDCC is provisioned for OSI, the following subnetwork point-of-attachment (SNPA) information is displayed: •Router—Indicates the ONS router and NSAP address. •Router State—Indicates whether the router is enabled or disabled.
Service State	Select the state of the termination: •IS-NR—In Service-Normal. •OOS-AU—Out of Service-Autonomous. •OOS-MA—Out of Service-Management. •OOS-AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management. In addition, a secondary state provides additional information about the status of the entity. Values for secondary state are: •MEA—Mismatch of equipment due to invalid equipment insertion. •UEQ—Unequipped; there is nothing in the slot. •UAS—Unassigned; the entity does not exist, has not been created, or has been deleted. •SWDL—Software download in progress. •MT—Maintenance, as per the Admin State change. •AINS—Automatic in service. •DSBLD—Traffic is disabled on the entity. •LPBK—Port or connection has a loopback on it. •FLT—Fault secondary state. When an entity is faulted, an FLT state is raised. Equipment and ports in FLT state should be cleared as they transition. Transition states are listed in Table 11-10 on page 11-14. See Table 11-10 on page 11-14 for the Service state-Secondary state possible values. Note If the NE release does not support the Service state, this field shows N/A.
LDCC
LDCC Terminations	Displays the slot, port, and card type of an LDCC termination. Click Create to create a new LDCC termination; click Delete to delete the selected LDCC termination.
OSPF Disabled on Link	Check to prevent the advertisement of the OSPF routing table.
Foreign	A check mark indicates that the far-end node is a non-ONS node.
Foreign IP	Displays the foreign node IP address.
LAPD Config	If the SDCC is provisioned as OSI only, the following SDCC LAP-D parameters are displayed: •AITS/UITS—Indicates the LAP-D acknowledgement type, either AITS (Acknowledged Information Transfer Service) or UITS (Unacknowledged Transfer Service). •Network/User—Indicates the LAP-D frame command/response role, either Network or User. •MTU—Shows the size of the maximum transfer unit (MTU). The range is from 512 to 1500 octets. •T2000—Shows the time between SABME (Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode) frame transmission. The range is from 0.2 to 20 seconds. •T203—Shows the maximum time between LAP-D frame exchanges. The range is from 4 to 120 seconds.
OSI SNPA	If the SDCC is provisioned for OSI, the following subnetwork point-of-attachment (SNPA) information is displayed: •Router—Indicates the ONS router and NSAP address. •Router State—Indicates whether the router is enabled or disabled.
Service State	Select the state of the LDCC termination: •IS-NR—In Service-Normal •OOS-AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS-MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS-AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management In addition, a secondary state provides additional information about the status of the entity. Values for secondary state are: •MEA—Mismatch of equipment due to invalid equipment insertion •UEQ—Unequipped; there is nothing in the slot •UAS—Unassigned; the entity does not exist, has not been created, or has been deleted •SWDL—Software download in progress •MT—Maintenance, as per the Admin State change •AINS—Automatic in service •DSBLD—Traffic is disabled on the entity •LPBK—Port or connection has a loopback on it
Create button	Allows you to create new terminations on SONET or SDH cards.
Edit button	Allows you to modify existing terminations on SONET or SDH cards.
Delete button	Allows you to delete the selected SDCC or LDCC.

B.5.1.5  Timing Tab

The Timing tab contains the following subtabs:

•General Subtab

•Reference List Subtab

•Status Subtab

•Timing Report Subtab

B.5.1.5.1  General Subtab

The General subtab displays general timing information.

Table B-50 Field Descriptions for the General Subtab 

Field	Description
General Timing
Timing Mode	Set the node timing mode: •External—The ONS 15310 derives its timing from a BITS source wired to the backplane pins. •Line—Timing is derived from an OC-N card (non-DWDM nodes) or OSC card (DWDM nodes) that is optically connected to the timing node. •Mixed—Timing is set to external and line timing references. Caution Mixed timing might cause timing loops; it is recommended that you use this mode with care.
SSM Message Set	Choose the sync status message (SSM) set level supported by your network. SSM is a SONET protocol that communicates information about the quality of the timing source. SSM messages are carried on the S1 byte of the SONET Line layer. They enable SONET devices to automatically select the highest quality timing reference and to avoid timing loops. If a Generation 1 node receives a Generation 2 message, the message will be mapped down to the next available Generation 1. For example, an ST3E message becomes an ST3.
Revertive	If checked, the ONS 15310 reverts to a primary reference source after the conditions that caused it to switch to a secondary timing reference are corrected.
Reversion Time	Use the Reversion Time field to specify the time in half-minute increments.
Quality of RES	If your timing source supports the reserved S1 byte, you set the timing quality here. (Most timing sources do not use RES.) Qualities are displayed in descending quality order as ranges. For example, ST3 < RES < ST2 means the timing reference is higher than a Stratum 3 and lower than a Stratum 2.
BITS-IN-OUT Facility Type
In Facility Type	Provision the BITS In facility type.
Out Facility Type	Provisions the BITS Out facility type.
BITS Facilities 1
In State	Set the BITS In state to In Service (IS) or Out of Service (OOS). If Timing Mode is set to External or Mixed, set the BITS In State for BITS-1 and/or BITS-2 to IS (In Service) depending on whether one or both BITS input pin pairs on the backplane are connected to the external timing source. If Timing Mode is set to Line, set the BITS In State to OOS.
Coding	Set to the coding used by your BITS reference, either B8ZS or AMI.
Framing	Set to the framing used by your BITS reference, either Extended Super Frame (ESF), or Super Frame (SF). SSM is not available with Super Frame.
Sync Messaging	If checked, enables the Synchronization Status Message (SSM) for BITS In. (SSM is not available if Framing is set to Super Frame.)
Admin SSM	If the Sync Messaging check box is not checked, you can choose the SSM Generation 2 type from the drop-down list.
BITS OUT Facilities
Out State	Set the BITS reference to IS (In Service) or OOS (Out of Service). For nodes set to Line timing with no equipment timed through BITS Out, set State to OOS. For nodes using External timing or Line timing with equipment timed through BITS Out, set State to IS.
Coding	Set to the coding used by your BITS reference, either B8ZS or AMI.
Framing	Set to the framing used by your BITS reference, either ESF or SF (D4). SSM is not available with Super Frame.
AIS Threshold	If SSM is disabled or Super Frame is used, set the quality level where a node sends an alarm indication signal (AIS) from the BITS-1 Out and BITS-2 Out backplane pins. An AIS is raised when the optical source for the BITS reference falls to or below the SSM quality level defined in this field.
LBO	If you are timing an external device connected to the BITS Out pins, set the distance between it and the ONS 15310. Options are 0-133 ft. (Cisco default), 134-266 ft., 267-399 ft., 400-533 ft., and 534-655 ft.

B.5.1.5.2  Reference List Subtab

The Reference List subtab provides timing reference information.

Table B-51 Field Descriptions for the Reference List Subtab 

Field	Description
NE References	Allows you to define three timing references (Ref-1, Ref-2, Ref-3). The node uses Reference 1 unless a failure occurs on that reference, in which case, the node uses Reference 2. If that fails, the node uses Reference 3, which is typically set to the internal clock. This is the Stratum 3 clock provided on the TCC+. The options displayed depend on the Timing Mode setting. •Timing Mode set to External—Options are BITS-1, BITS-2, and Internal. •Timing Mode set to Line—Options are the node's working optical cards and Internal. Select the cards/ports that are directly or indirectly connected to the node wired to the BITS source; that is, the node's trunk cards. Set Reference 1 to the trunk card that is closest to the BITS source. For example, if Slot 5 is connected to the node wired to the BITS source, select Slot 5 as Reference 1. •Timing Mode set to Mixed—Both BITS and optical cards are available, allowing you to set a mixture of external BITS and optical trunk cards as timing references.
BITS-1 Out References	Allows you to define three timing references (Ref-1, Ref-2, Ref-3) for equipment wired to the BITS Out backplane pins. Normally, BITS Out is used with line nodes, so the options displayed are the working optical cards. BITS-1 Out is enabled as soon as BITS-1 facilities are placed in service.

B.5.1.5.3  Status Subtab

The Status subtab provides timing status information.

---

Note If you change any values in the Status subtab and click Apply at the bottom of the screen, the values are not set. Instead, use the following buttons to apply changes:

•Clear—Releases any existing switch request. For example, if you issue a Force Switch and then issue a Clear, the Force Switch request is released.

•Manual Switch—Switches the timing reference from one source to another.

•Force Switch—Switches the timing reference from one source to another. This request has a higher priority than the Manual Switch request.

---

Table B-52 Field Descriptions for the Status Subtab 

Field	Description
NE Clock
NE Reference	Set the NE timing reference to internal, BITS-1, or BITS-2.
Status	Displays the status of the NE clock.
Operations	Execute a switch on the NE timing reference. Allows you to perform a manual switch, perform a forced switch, or clear the existing command switching.
BITS-1 Out
BITS-1 Out	Set the BITS-1 out timing reference.
Status	Displays the status of the BITS-1 out timing reference.
Operations	Execute a switch on the BITS-1 out timing reference. Allows you to perform a manual switch, perform a forced switch, or clear the existing command switching.

B.5.1.5.4  Timing Report Subtab

The Timing Report subtab summarizes the NE's current timing settings.

B.5.1.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab contains the following subtabs:

•Protection Groups Subtab

•Operations Subtab

B.5.1.6.1  Protection Groups Subtab

The Protection Groups subtab displays a list of available protection groups and allows you to create, delete, and view protection groups.

Table B-53 Field Descriptions for the Protection Groups Subtab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups
Displays a list of available protection groups. Click the Create or Delete button to create a new protection group or delete an existing one.
Selected Protection Group
Name	Modify the name of the selected protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Type	View the protection type (1:1 [card], 1:N [card], Y Cable [port], or 1+1 [port]) of the selected protection group.
Protect Module	View the protect module if using 1+1 protection.
Available Entities	Displays a list of available entities. You can toggle between available and working entities.
Working Entities	Displays a list of working entities. You can toggle between working and available entities.
Bidirectional Switching	Click if you want both the transmit and the receive channels to switch if a failure occurs on one. This option is only available if you select 1+1 (port) type.
Revertive	If checked, the node reverts traffic to the working card or port after failure conditions stay corrected for the amount of time entered in Reversion Time. This option is not available if the 1:N (card) type has been selected.
Reversion Time	If Revertive is checked, choose the amount of time following failure condition correction after which the node should switch back to the working card or port. Use half-minute increments. This option is only available if you select 1:1 (card) type.

B.5.1.6.2  Operations Subtab

The Operations subtab displays the protection group operation information.

Table B-54 Field Descriptions for the Operations Subtab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection groups and allows you to execute switch commands.

B.5.1.7  NE Defaults Tab

The NE Defaults tab displays a list of default thresholds for the ONS 15310 NE. You can edit NE defaults for the ONS 15310 R5.0 and later.

Table B-55 Field Descriptions for the NE Defaults Tab 

Field	Description
Parameter	Lists the default NE parameter.
Value	Shows the default parameter value, and allows you to change the default.
Units	Lists the unit of measure that corresponds to the default NE parameter.
Range	Lists the possible range of values for the default NE parameter. Note This field applies to the ONS 15310 R6.0 and later.
Side Effects	Lists any side effects that could occur as a result of changing the default NE parameter. Note This field applies to the ONS 15310 R6.0 and later.

You can load different NE defaults using the NE Defaults Management window. See 4.5.10  Restoring NE Defaults, page 4-78.

B.5.1.8  Security Tab

The Security tab allows you to view and edit security features for the ONS 15310 NE. The security tab contains the following subtabs:

•Policy Subtab

•Password Subtab

•Access Subtab

•RADIUS Server Subtab

•Legal Disclaimer Subtab

B.5.1.8.1  Policy Subtab

The Policy subtab allows you to specify user security parameters.

---

Note If the user is already logged in, any changes to the NE user type settings become applicable only when the user next logs in.

---

Table B-56 Field Descriptions for the Policy Subtab 

Field	Description
Idle User Timeout
Each CTC or TL1 user can be idle during his or her login session for a specified amount of time before the CTC window is locked. The lockouts prevent unauthorized users from making changes. Higher-level users have shorter default idle periods and lower-level users have longer or unlimited default idle periods. The user idle period can be modified by a SuperUser. Note A user already logged into the node is not affected by a change to the Idle User Timeout policy.
Retrieve	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC Retrieve user.
Maintenance	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC Maintenance user.
Provisioner	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC Provisioner user.
SuperUser	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC SuperUser user.
User Lockout
Manual Unlock by SuperUser	If checked, the CTC SuperUser user must manually unlock locked out CTC users. If unchecked, locked out CTC users are automatically unlocked after the lockout duration period elapses.
Lockout Duration	Set the lockout duration period for locked out CTC users. This field is only enabled if the Manual Unlock by SuperUser check box is unchecked.
Failed Logins Allowed	Set the number of failed logins before the CTC user is automatically locked out.
Other
Single Sessions per User	If checked, each CTC user can only launch one session at a time.
Disable Inactive User	If checked, inactive users are disabled automatically for the amount of time in the Inactive Duration field.
Inactive Duration	Specify the inactive duration in days. The range is from 1 to 90 days; the Cisco default is 45 days. A value of 0 implies inactive duration is disabled and invalid.

B.5.1.8.2  Password Subtab

The Password subtab allows you to specify user password security parameters.

Table B-57 Field Descriptions for the Password Subtab 

Field	Description
Password Change
Prevent Reusing Last	Prevents setting a CTC user's current password to one of the most recent passwords. You can set the number of most recent passwords that cannot be reused. The range is from 1 to 10.
Disable Password Flipping	If checked, users are not allowed to change passwords for the number of days specified in the Cannot Change New Password For field.
Can Change Password After	Enter the number of days that must elapse before the user can change the password.
Force Password Change After Assigned	If checked, during the first successful login, the user is forced to change the password.
Password Difference	Allows SuperUsers to specify the number of characters by which the new password of a user must differ from the old password, while performing a password change. The default value is 1. The range is from 1 to 5 characters.
Password Aging
Enable Password Aging	Check this check box to enable password aging.
Aging Period	Enter the aging period, in days, for Retrieve, Maintenance, Provisioner, and SuperUser CTC users. After the aging period expires, CTC users are forced to change their passwords.
Warning Period	Enter the warning period, in days, for Retrieve, Maintenance, Provisioner, and SuperUser CTC users. After the warning period expires, CTC users are warned that their passwords will soon expire.

B.5.1.8.3  Access Subtab

The Access subtab allows you to configure LAN and shell access to the NE.

Table B-58 Field Descriptions for the Access Subtab 

Field	Description
LAN Access
LAN Access	Specify the type of LAN access allowed. Values allowed for the ONS 15310 are Front Only or No LAN Access. Note After setting the LAN access to the backplane, the CTM client is unusable for 4 to 5 minutes.
Restore Timeout	This time period begins if No LAN Access is selected and all DCC connections are lost. If the time expires before a DCC is restored, LAN access is restored so that the node is not isolated. When the DCC comes back, LAN access returns to its specified settings. The range is from 0 (never) to 60 minutes; the Cisco default is 5 minutes.
Serial Craft Access (available for ONS 15310 CL NEs R6.0 and later)
Enable Craft Port	Check this check box to enable the craft port.
Shell Access
Shell Access on	Specify shell access on Telnet or SSH.
SSH Port	Indicates the SSH port number that will be used if the SSH radio button is selected.
Telnet Port	This is enabled if you selected the Telnet radio button. Enter the Telnet port number.
Use Standard Telnet Port	If checked, the standard Telnet port is used for Telnet access.
Shell Access (available for ONS 15310 CL NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the Shell access state from the pull-down menu. You can select Disable, Non-secure, or Secure.
SSH Port	Indicates the SSH port number that will be used.
Telnet Port	This is enabled if you selected the Non-secure access state. Enter the Telnet port number that will be used.
Use Standard Telnet Port	Check this check box to indicate that the standard Telnet port will be used.
Enable Shell Password	Indicates whether or not the Shell password is enabled. Note You cannot enable the Shell password in CTM R6.0. Enabling and providing a Shell password is currently done in CTC.
EMS Access (available for ONS 15310 CL NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the EMS access state from the pull-down menu. You can select either Non-secure or Secure.
CORBA Listener Port	Select the port numbers for the CTX CORBA (IIOP) listener port and the CTX CORBA (SSLIOP) listener port. Select one of the following radio buttons: •Default-Fixed—Assigns a default port number. •Standard Constant—Port number for the CTX CORBA (IIOP) listener port will be 683. Port number for the CTX CORBA (SSLIOP) listener port will be 684. •Other Constant—When selected, enter the port number that will be used.
TL1 Access (available for ONS 15310 CL NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the TL1 access state from the pull-down menu. You can select Disable, Non-secure, or Secure.
SNMP Access (available for ONS 15310 CL NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the SNMP access state from the pull-down menu. You can select either Disable or Non-secure.
Other
PM Clearing Privilege	Select the users privilege that allows clearing PM statistics for the NE.

B.5.1.8.4  RADIUS Server Subtab

The RADIUS Server subtab allows you to configure, create, modify, and delete RADIUS servers for the ONS 15310 R6.0 and later.

Table B-59 Field Descriptions for the RADIUS Server Subtab 

Field	Description
Enable RADIUS Authentication	Check this check box to enable RADIUS authentication.
Enable RADIUS Accounting	Check this check box to enable RADIUS accounting. This is enabled if the Enable RADIUS Authentication check box is checked.
Enable the Node as the Final Authenticator When no RADIUS server is reachable	Select a row from the RADIUS Servers in Order of Authentication table; then, check this check box. This indicates that the RADIUS server that you selected will be the final authenticator when there are no more RADIUS servers that can be reached.
Create	Click this button to create a RADIUS server. See 8.4.2.1.1  Creating a RADIUS Server, page 8-50.
Edit	Click this button to modify an existing RADIUS server's information. See 8.4.2.1.2  Modifying a RADIUS Server, page 8-50.
Delete	Click this button to delete an existing RADIUS server. See 8.4.2.1.3  Deleting a RADIUS Server, page 8-50.
Move Up/Move Down	Select the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the list of RADIUS servers in the RADIUS Servers in Order of Authentication table.
RADIUS Servers in Order of Authentication
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the RADIUS server.
Shared Secret	Displays a text string that serves as a password between a RADIUS client and RADIUS server.
Authentication Port	Displays the authentication port number of the RADIUS server. Default access is through port number 1812.
Accounting Port	Displays the accounting port number of the RADIUS server. Default access is through port number 1813.

B.5.1.8.5  Legal Disclaimer Subtab

The Legal Disclaimer subtab allows you to edit the NE's advisory message and preview the disclaimer.

Table B-60 Field Descriptions for the Legal Disclaimer Subtab 

Subtab	Description
Advisory Message	The existing message is a default, noncustomer-specific disclaimer. If you want to edit this statement with specifics for your company, you can change the text. You can also use the following HTML commands to format the text: <b> Begins boldface font </b> Ends boldface font <center> Aligns type in the center of the window </center> Ends the center alignment <font=n, where n = point size> Changes the font to the new size </font> Ends the font size command <p> Creates a line break <sub> Begins subscript </sub> Ends subscript <sup> Begins superscript </sup> Ends superscript <u> Starts underline </u> Ends underline
Preview	Allows you to view the advisory message before saving it.

B.5.1.9  Alarm Tab

The Alarm tab allows you to change default alarm severities by creating unique alarm profiles for individual ONS 15310 nodes. The Alarm tab contains the following subtabs:

•Profile Subtab

•Alarm Behavior Subtab

---

Note The Alarm tab might contain default alarm profile entries for cards that are not supported by the Cisco ONS 15310. Therefore, you might see some alarms that do not apply to the NE type that you are provisioning.

---

B.5.1.9.1  Profile Subtab

The Profile subtab allows you to select, create, or delete alarm profiles.

Table B-61 Field Descriptions for the Profile Subtab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile Name	Choose an alarm profile for the NE from the drop-down list. Click Create to create a new alarm profile for the NE. Click Delete to delete an alarm profile from the NE.
Condition	Displays the alarm condition.
Severity	Displays the alarm severity.

B.5.1.9.2  Alarm Behavior Subtab

The Alarm Behavior subtab allows you to change default alarm severities by creating unique alarm profiles.

Table B-62 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Subtab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Choose a global alarm profile for the NE from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed.
Slot Number	Displays the location of the module.
Equipment Type	Displays the type of module in the slot.
Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the slot from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	Indicates whether or not the alarms for the particular card are suppressed. If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.

B.5.1.10  XC Utilization Tab

The XC Utilization tab allows you to view a summary of the percentage of XTC cross-connect resources used by circuits that traverse or terminate at an ONS 15310.

Table B-63 Field Descriptions for the XC Utilization Tab 

Field	Description
STS-1 Matrix	Provides the percentage of the XC cross-connect STS-1 paths resources that are used.
VT Matrix Ports	Provides the percentage of the XTC cross-connect VT matrix ports that are used. Each port is one STS in size, and each can transport 28 VT1.5s. 24 VT matrix ports are available.
VT Matrix	Provides the percentage of the VT matrix resources that are used. 672 are available, which is the number of VT matrix ports (24) multiplied by the number of VT1.5s in an STS (28).

B.5.1.11  OSI Tab

---

Note The OSI tab is supported only for the ONS 15310 R6.0 and later.

---

The OSI tab allows you to provision ONS 15310 Open System Interconnection (OSI) parameters. It contains the following subtabs:

•Main Setup Subtab

•TARP-Config Subtab

•TARP-TDC Subtab

•TARP-MAT Subtab

•Routers-Setup Subtab

•Subnets Subtab

•Tunnels Subtab

•IS-IS RIB Subtab

•ES-IS RIB Subtab

B.5.1.11.1  Main Setup Subtab

The Main Setup subtab allows you to provision the OSI Network Entity Title (NET) address and the OSI routing mode.

Table B-64 Field Descriptions for the Main Setup Subtab 

Field	Description
Main Network Entity Title	Displays the node NET. The NET is used in OSI networks to identify the node to the end system (ES) or intermediate system (IS).
End System	Provisions the node as an OSI End System (ES). ESs send End System Hello (ESH) messages regularly to announce their presence to neighboring ISs and ESs. For the ONS 15310, End System is the Cisco default.
Intermediate System Level 1	Provisions the node as an OSI Intermediate System (IS). ISs send Intermediate System Hello (ISH) messages regularly to announce their presence to neighboring ISs and ESs.
Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2	The ONS 15310 performs all IS functions. It communicates with other IS and ES nodes within an OSI area and broadcasts ISHs to IS nodes in other areas to which it is connected.
Node Routing Mode
L1 LSP Buffer Size	Sets the Level 1 Link State Protocol (LSP) data unit buffer size. The Cisco default 512.
L2 LSP Buffer Size	Sets the Level 2 Link State Protocol (LSP) data unit buffer size. The Cisco default 512.

B.5.1.11.2  TARP-Config Subtab

The TARP Config subtab allows you to provision the TID Address Resolution protocol (TARP). TARP is used when TL1 TIDs must be translated to an NSAP address. During the TID-to-NSAP translation, the TID is mapped to a NET; then, the NSAP is derived from the NET based on the NSAP selector value.

Table B-65 Field Descriptions for the TARP-Config Subtab 

Field	Description
TARP PDUs L1 Propagation	If checked (default), TARP Type 1 PDUs received by the node that are not excluded by the loop detection buffer are propagated to other NEs within the OSI Level 1 area. Type 1 PDUs request a protocol address that matches a target TID within a Level1 routing area. The propagation does not occur if the NE is the target of the Type 1 PDU and the PDUs are not propagated to the NE from which the PDU was received. Note This parameter is not used when the node is set to End System.
TARP PDUs Origination	If checked (default), the node performs all TARP configuration functions, including: •TID-to-NSAP resolution requests •NSAP-to-TID requests •TARP address changes Note TARP Echo and NSAP to TID are not supported.
L2 TARP Data Cache	If checked (default), the TIDs and NSAPs are added to the TDC before the node propagates the requests to other NEs. Note This parameter is designed for IS Level 1/Level 2 nodes that are connected to other IS Level 1/Level 2 nodes. Enabling the parameter for IS Level 1 nodes is not recommended.
LAN TARP Storm Suppression	If checked (default), enables the TARP storm suppression to prevent redundant TARP PDUs from being propagated across the network.
Type 4 PDU Delay	Sets the amount of time that will pass before the Type 4 PDU is generated. The Cisco default value is 60 seconds. The range is from 0 to 255 seconds.
TARP PDUs L2 Propagation	If checked (default), TARP Type 2 PDUs received by the node that are not excluded by the loop detection buffer are propagated to other NEs within the OSI Level 2 area. Type 2 PDUs request a protocol address that matches a target TID within a Level 2 routing area. The propagation occurs if the NE is the not the target of the Type 2 PDU and the PDUs are not propagated to the NE from which the PDU was received.
L1 TARP Data Cache	If checked, the node maintains a TARP data cache (TDC). The TDC is a database of TID to NSAP pairs created from TARP Type 3 PDUs received by the node. TARP 3 PDUs are responses to Type 1 and Type 2 PDUs and modified by TARP Type 4 PDUs (TID to NSAP updates or corrections).
LDB	If checked, enables the TARP loop detection buffer (LDB). The LDB prevents TARP PDUs from being sent more than once on the same subnet.
Send Type 4 PDU on Startup	If checked, a TARP Type 4 PDU is originated during the initial ONS 15310 startup. Type 4 PDUs indicate a TID or NSAP change has occurred at the NE. This is disabled by default.
Timers
LDB Entry	Sets the TARP LDB timer. The LDB buffer time is assigned to each LDB entry for which the TARP sequence number is zero. The Cisco default is 5 minutes. The range is from 1 to 10 minutes.
T1 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for response to a Type 1 Request PDU. Type 1 requests seek a specific NE TID within an OSI Level 1 area. The Cisco default is 15 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.
T3 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for an address resolution request. The Cisco default is 40 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.
LDB Flush	Sets the frequency period for flushing the LDB. The Cisco default is 5 minutes. The range is from 0 to 1440 minutes.
T2 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for a Type 2 Request PDU. TARP Type 2 requests seek a specific NE TID within an OSI Level 1 area. The Cisco default is 25 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.
T4 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for an error recovery. The timer begins after the T2 timer expires without successfully finding the NE TID. The Cisco default is 20 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.

B.5.1.11.3  TARP-TDC Subtab

Table B-66 Field Descriptions for the TARP-TDC Subtab 

Field	Description
Add Static Entry button	Click this button to statically link a TID to an NSAP or NET.
Delete Selected Entry button	Deletes the selected TID to NSAP/NET static entry.
TID to NSAP button	Click this button to query the network for an NSAP that matches a TID.
Flush Dynamic Entries button	Click this button to delete all dynamically generated TDC entries.
TID	Target ID that is statistically linked to an NSAP or NET. For ONS nodes, the TID is the node name.
NSAP/NET	The NSAP that is statistically linked to the TID.
Type	Indicates how the TARP data cache entry was created. It can be either: •Dynamic—The entry was created through the TARP propagation process. •Static—The entry was manually created and is a static entry.

B.5.1.11.4  TARP-MAT Subtab

The TARP-MAT subtab allows you to manually provision a TARP adjacency.

Table B-67 Field Descriptions for the TARP-MAT Subtab 

Field	Description
Level	Sets the TARP Type Code that will be sent. •Level 1—Indicates that the manual area adjacency is within the same area as the node. The entry generates Type 1 PDUs. •Level 2—Indicates that the manual area adjacency is in an area different from the node. The entry generates Type 2 PDUs.
NSAP	The NSAP address of the node at the other end of the TARP manual adjacency.
Add	Click this button to create a TARP manual area adjacency.
Remove	Click this button to delete the selected TID to NSAP/NET static entry.

B.5.1.11.5  Routers-Setup Subtab

The Routers-Setup subtab allows you to view and manage OSI virtual routers.

Table B-68 Field Descriptions for the Routers-Setup Subtab 

Field	Description
Router Number	Displays the virtual router number. Only one router is available on the ONS 15310.
System ID	Displays the NSAP system ID of the virtual router. For the primary router (Router 1), n = 0.
Status	Indicates the virtual router status. Select Enabled or Disabled from the drop-down menu. Note Router 1 must be enabled before additional routers can be enabled.
Primary Area Address	Indicates the primary manual area address. For Router 1, this is the main NET for the node; that is, the NSAP without the system ID and selector (set to 00) fields.
Manual Area Address 1	Indicates the address of any additional manual areas that are created. Note An OSI area allows up to two additional manual areas in addition to the primary manual area.
Manual Area Address 2	Indicates the address of any additional manual areas that are created. Note An OSI area allows up to two additional manual areas in addition to the primary manual area.

B.5.1.11.6  Subnets Subtab

The Subnets subtab allows you to view and manage OSI subnetwork point-of-attachment parameters. The parameters are initially provisioned when you enable a subnet on an SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, or LAN interface.

Table B-69 Field Descriptions for the Subnets Subtab 

Field	Description
Enable LAN Subnet	(Router 1 only). Enables OSI over the LAN; that is, it activates the IS-IS protocol on the LAN so OSI traffic is enabled on the LAN.
Edit	Click Edit to modify subnet parameters.
Disable LAN Subnet	(Router 1 only). Disables OSI over the LAN if it has been enabled.
Slot/Port	The subnet slot and port.
Router Number	The OSI virtual router where the subnet (SDCC, LDCC, GCC, or OSC) is provisioned.
Type	The interface where the subnet is provisioned: SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, or LAN.
Protocol	The data link protocol that is provisioned for the subnet. It can be: •Point to Point Protocol (PPP) •Link Access Protocol on the D channel (LAP-D) •802.3 for LAN subnets
ISH	The Intermediate System Hello (ISH) PDU propagation frequency. Intermediate system NEs send ISHs to other ESs and ISs to inform them about the NETs they serve. The Cisco default is 10 seconds. The range is from 10 to 1000 seconds.
ESH	The End System Hello (ESH) PDU propagation frequency. End system NEs transmit ESHs to inform other ESs and ISs about the NSAPs they serve. The Cisco default is 10 seconds. The range is from 10 to 1000 seconds.
IIH	The Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System Hello (IIH) PDU propagation frequency. The IS-IS Hello PDUs establish and maintain adjacencies between ISs. The Cisco default is 3 seconds. The range is from 1 to 600 seconds.
DisPriority	The designated intermediate system (DIS) priority. In IS-IS networks, one router is elected as the DIS. For Cisco routers, the DIS priority is 64.
IS-IS Cost	The cost for sending packets on the subnet. This is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. The Cisco default value is 20.

B.5.1.11.7  Tunnels Subtab

The Tunnels subtab allows you to view, create, edit, and delete Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) and Cisco tunnels. GRE tunnels encapsulate one network protocol for transfer across another network layer. Within a mixed TCP/IP and OSI network, GRE tunnels tunnel IP traffic over an OSI NE and OSI traffic over an IP NE.

Table B-70 Field Descriptions for the Tunnels Subtab 

Field	Description
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the GRE destination CTM or CTC computer.
NetMask Address	Displays the IP address subnet mask of the destination CTM or CTC computer.
NSAP Address	The destination NE NSAP address. The NSAP selector (last two NSAP characters) must be 2f (GRE tunnel) or cc (proprietary Cisco tunnel), depending on which tunnel type you want to create. The Cisco proprietary tunnel is slightly more efficient than the GRE tunnel because it does not add an encapsulation header for each IP packet, while the GRE tunnel adds a small header to the packets. The two tunnel types are incompatible. Note Most Cisco routers support the Cisco tunnel, while only a few support both GRE and Cisco IP tunnels.
OSPF Metric	Displays the cost for sending packets across the GRE tunnel. Cost is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path.
Create	Click Create to create a new GRE tunnel route.
Edit	Click Edit to edit an existing GRE tunnel.
Delete	Click Delete to delete an existing GRE tunnel.

B.5.1.11.8  IS-IS RIB Subtab

The IS-IS RIB subtab allows you to view the Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System protocol routing information base. IS-IS is an OSI link-state hierarchical routing protocol that floods the network with link-state information that enables the NEs to build a complete and consistent picture of a network topology.

Table B-71 Field Descriptions for the IS-IS RIB Subtab 

Field	Description
Router Number	Displays the virtual router number. Only one router is available on the ONS 15310.
Subnet Type	Indicates the OSI subnetwork point-of-attachment type used to access the destination address. It includes SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, and LAN.
Destination Address	Displays the Network Service Access Point (NSAP).
MAC Address	Displays the NE's Media Access Control (MAC) address for destinations that are accessed by the LAN subnets.

B.5.1.11.9  ES-IS RIB Subtab

The ES-IS RIB subtab allows you to view the End System to Intermediate System (ES-IS) protocol routing information base (RIB). ES-IS is an OSI protocol that defines how end systems (hosts) and intermediate systems (routers) learn about each other.

Table B-72 Field Descriptions for the ES-IS RIB Subtab 

Field	Description
Router Number	Displays the virtual router number. Only one router is available on the ONS 15310.
Subnet Type	Indicates the OSI subnetwork point-of-attachment type used to access the destination address. It includes SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, and LAN.
Destination Address	Displays the Network Service Access Point (NSAP) of the destination ES.
MAC Address	Displays the NE's Media Access Control (MAC) address for destinations that are accessed by the LAN subnets.

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.6  ONS 15327 NE Explorer

When you choose Configuration > NE Explorer for the ONS 15327, the window displayed by CTM consists of a tree on the left side and a properties pane on the right. (See Figure B-11.) The tree provides a hierarchical view and alarm status of the NE's physical shelves and slots. The properties pane shows information about the selected entity (NE or slot). See Node Properties Pane—ONS 15327 for more information.

Figure B-11 NE Explorer—ONS 15327

---

Note If CTC is launched from the web browser for an ONS 15327 node, the CTC GUI might look different from when it is launched from CTM. This discrepancy occurs because the latest version of CTC (for NE releases supported by CTM) is packaged with CTM. If launched from a browser, the CTC software is retrieved from the NE itself, which might be a version different from that packaged with CTM.

---

When an NE Explorer is in autorefresh mode, all values of an entity that is being edited by the user are automatically refreshed. You will lose all of your changes unless you click the Apply button. To enable autorefresh, click the Refresh Data button in the NE Explorer.

B.6.1  Node Properties Pane—ONS 15327

The node properties pane for the ONS 15327 displays information about the ONS 15327 NE. The ONS 15327 properties pane contains the following tabs, some of which apply only to a specific NE version:

•Shelf View Tab

•Identification Tab

•Network Tab

•DCC Tab

•Timing Tab

•Protection Tab

•Ether Bridge Tab

•NE Defaults Tab

•Security Tab

•Alarm Tab

•XC Utilization Tab

•BLSR Tab

•OSI Tab

B.6.1.1  Shelf View Tab

The Shelf View tab displays a graphic of the ONS 15327 that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Moving the mouse pointer over the graphic of the NE, its shelves, slots, or cards displays the current alarms for the shelf, slot, or card. Double-clicking a slot or card displays the slot or card in the properties pane. The right-click menu allows you to reset, delete, or change the card. For unprovisioned slots, the right-click menu allows you to add a card.

B.6.1.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays identification information about the ONS 15327 NE.

Table B-73 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the ID of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
Description	Displays the description of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
NE Model	Displays the NE model type.
Software Version	Displays the current running version of the system software.
Contact	Displays the name of the node contact person and the phone number.
System Description	Displays a description of the NE.
SNTP Settings
Use NTP/SNTP Server	If checked, CTC uses an SNTP server to set the date and time of the node. Using an SNTP server ensures that all ONS 15327 network nodes use the same date and time reference. The server synchronizes the node's time after power outages or software upgrades. If you check the Use NTP/SNTP Server check box, enter the server's IP address in the next field. If you do not use an SNTP server, complete the Time and Time Zone fields. The ONS 15327 will use these fields for alarm dates and times.
SNTP Server	Displays the SNTP server IP address.
Location
Latitude	Allows you to set the latitude of the NE. Select North or South from the drop-down list; then, enter the degrees and minutes (or click the up and down arrows to increase or decrease each by 1 unit).
Longitude	Allows you to set the longitude of the NE. Select East or West from the drop-down list; then, enter the degrees and minutes (or click the up and down arrows to increase or decrease each by 1 unit).
Date and Time
Time	Displays the NE date and time.
Time Zone	Displays the time zone where the NE is located.
Use Daylight Savings Time	If checked, Daylight Savings Time is observed.
AIS-V Insertion on STS-1 Signal Degrade - Path
Insert AIS-V on STS-1 SD-P	If checked, the NE inserts an AIS-V signal when it detects an STS-1 signal degrade.
SD-P BER	Select the signal degrade path bit error rate for AIS-V insertion.

B.6.1.3  Network Tab

The Network tab displays information about the NE network address. The Network tab contains the following subtabs:

•Address Subtab

•Static Routes Subtab

•OSPF Subtab

•OSPF Area Range Subtab

•OSPF Virtual Links Subtab

•SNMP Subtab

•Firewall/Proxy Subtab

•RIP Routing Table Subtab

•RIP Subtab

•Routing Table Subtab

•Proxy Tunnels Subtab

•Firewall Tunnels Subtab

B.6.1.3.1  Address Subtab

The Address subtab allows you to view and change information about the NE network address.

Table B-74 Field Descriptions for the Address Subtab 

Field	Description
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the NE.
Default Router	Displays the IP address of the default router.
Subnet Mask	Displays the subnetwork mask ID of the NE.
MAC Address	Displays the ONS 15327 address as it is identified on the IEEE 802 MAC layer.
Forward DHCP Requests	If checked, forwards Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) requests to the IP address entered in the DHCP Server field. When the Forward DHCP Requests check box is unchecked, the field is read-only.
DHCP Server	Displays the IP address of the DHCP server.

B.6.1.3.2  Static Routes Subtab

The Static Routes subtab allows you to view information about CTM and ONS 15327 connectivity and create or delete static routes.

Table B-75 Field Descriptions for the Static Routes Subtab 

Field	Description
Destination IP	Displays the IP address of the computer running CTM.
Subnet Mask	Displays the subnetwork mask.
Next Hop	Displays the IP address of the router port or the node IP address if the CTM computer is connected to the node directly.
Cost	Displays the number of hops between the ONS 15327 and the computer.

B.6.1.3.3  OSPF Subtab

The OSPF subtab displays OSPF information. OSPF is a link state Internet routing protocol.

Table B-76 Field Descriptions for the OSPF Subtab 

Field	Description
Slot	Displays the slot number.
Port	Displays the port number.
DCC OSPF Area ID	Displays the number that identifies the ONS 15327 as a unique OSPF area. The OSPF area number can be from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The number must be unique to the LAN OSPF area.
SDCC Metric	Sets a cost for sending packets across the Section Data Communications Channel (SDCC), which is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. This value should always be higher than the LAN metric. The Cisco default DCC metric is 100. This value is normally unchanged.
OSPF Active on LAN	If checked, enables the ONS 15327 OSPF topology to be advertised to OSPF routers on the LAN. Enable this field on ONS 15327s that connect directly to OSPF routers.
LAN Port Area ID	Displays the OSPF area ID for the router port where the ONS 15327 is connected. (This number is different from the DCC OSPF Area ID.)
Router Priority	Displays the designated router for a subnet.
Dead Interval	Displays the number of seconds that will pass while an OSPF router's packets are not visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the Cisco default.
Retransmit Interval	Displays the time that will elapse before a packet is resent. Five seconds is the Cisco default.
Hello Interval	Displays the number of seconds between OSPF hello packet advertisements sent by OSPF routers. Ten seconds is the Cisco default.
Transit Delay	Displays the service speed. One second is the Cisco default.
LAN Metric	Displays a cost for sending packets across the LAN. This value should always be lower than the DCC metric. Ten is the Cisco default.
Authentication Type	Displays Simple Password if the router where the ONS 15327 is connected uses authentication. Otherwise, it displays No Authentication.
Authentication Key	Displays the OSPF key (password) if authentication is enabled.
Confirm Authentication Key	Retype the authentication key to confirm it.

B.6.1.3.4  OSPF Area Range Subtab

The OSPF Area Range subtab allows you to view information about OSPF area ranges and create or delete area ranges.

Table B-77 Field Descriptions for the OSPF Area Range Subtab 

Field	Description
Range Address	Displays the area IP address for the ONS 15327s that reside within the OSPF area. For example, if the ONS 15327 OSPF area includes nodes with IP addresses 10.10.20.100, 10.10.30.150, 10.10.40.200, and 10.10.50.250, the range address would be 10.10.0.0.
Range Area ID	Displays the OSPF area ID for the ONS 15327. This is either the ID in the DCC OSPF Area ID field or the ID in the Area ID for LAN Port field.
Mask Length	Displays the subnet mask length.
Mask	Displays the subnet mask IP address.
Advertise	Indicates whether the OSPF range table is advertised.

B.6.1.3.5  OSPF Virtual Links Subtab

The OSPF Virtual Links subtab allows you to view information about OSPF virtual links and create or delete virtual links.

---

Note You cannot create a new virtual link unless OSPF is active on the LAN.

---

Table B-78 Field Descriptions for the OSPF Virtual Links Subtab 

Field	Description
Neighbor	Displays the router ID of the Area 0 router.
Transit Delay	Displays the service speed. One second is the Cisco default.
Retransmit Interval	Displays the time that will elapse before a packet is resent. Five seconds is the Cisco default.
Hello Interval	Displays the number of seconds between OSPF hello packet advertisements sent by OSPF routers. Ten seconds is the Cisco default.
Dead Interval	Displays the number of seconds that will pass while the packets of an OSPF router are not visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the Cisco default.
Authentication Type	Displays the authentication type.
Authentication Key	Displays the authentication key.

B.6.1.3.6  SNMP Subtab

The SNMP subtab allows you to view SNMP information and create or delete SNMP trap destinations.

Table B-79 Field Descriptions for the SNMP Subtab 

Field	Description
Allow SNMP Set	If checked, allows you to use SNMP management software with the ONS 15327.
Allow SNMP Proxy	If checked, allows you to configure the ONS 15327 to proxy SNMP calls.
IP Address	The IP address of the NMS.
Community Name	The SNMP community name. Note The SNMP community string cannot be blank in CTM. If a blank community string is required in CTC builds earlier than R4.6, you must set the blank community string in CTC.
UDP Port	The UDP port for SNMP. The Cisco default UDP port is 162.
Trap Version	The trap version, either SNMP version 1 or version 2. See your NMS documentation to determine whether to use SNMP version 1 or version 2.
Relay A IP Address	The first ONS 15327 to relay traps through. The IP address is appended to the base community string to tell the first NE that is relaying the trap the IP address and port to forward the trap to. The second NE recognizes the IP address and strips it from the community string before forwarding the trap.
Relay A Community Name	The community name for the relay A node to use in the trap when forwarding it.
Relay B IP Address	The second ONS 15327 to relay traps through.
Relay B Community Name	The community name for the relay B node to use in the trap when forwarding it.
Relay C IP Address	The third ONS 15327 to relay traps through.
Relay C Community Name	The community name for the relay C node to use in the trap when forwarding it.

B.6.1.3.7  Firewall/Proxy Subtab

The Firewall/Proxy subtab allows you to use an NE as a proxy server and/or as a firewall.

Table B-80 Field Descriptions for the Firewall/Proxy Subtab 

Field	Description
Craft Access Only	If checked, only allows CTC to access the firewall and proxy settings of the NE. Check this item only if the LAN port is used for direct workstation-to-network element connections, and not connected to a LAN. Disabling craft-only access allows the installation of a route to the LAN. Disable this only if the LAN port is actually connected to the LAN. Note This field applies only to ONS 15327 releases earlier than R4.6.
Enable Firewall	If checked, blocks packets routed between the local area and DCC networks. This causes a loss of connectivity to DCC-only connected NEs. CTM cannot reestablish the connection unless the proxy is enabled. Additionally, all NEs connected to the LAN must also have their firewall enabled, or connectivity problems will result. Note This field applies only to ONS 15327 releases earlier than R4.6.
Enable Proxy Server on Port	If checked, the ONS 15327 serves as a proxy for connections between the CTM server and ONS 15310s that are DCC-connected to the proxy ONS 15327. The CTM server establishes connections to DCC-connected nodes through the proxy node. The CTM server can connect to nodes that it cannot directly reach from the host on which it runs. The proxy server port number (read-only) is displayed following the Enable Proxy Server on Port field. The proxy server uses port number 1080. If checked, the following radio buttons are enabled: •External Network Element (ENE)—Enables the ONS 15327 to proxy as an ENE. •Gateway Network Element (GNE)—Enables the ONS 15327 to proxy as a GNE. •Proxy-only—Enables proxy only. If unchecked, the node does not proxy.

B.6.1.3.8  RIP Routing Table Subtab

The RIP Routing Table subtab allows you to view the RIP routing table.

Table B-81 Field Descriptions for the RIP Routing Table Subtab 

Field	Description
Destination	Displays the IP address of the destination network or host.
Mask	Displays the subnet mask used to reach the destination host or network.
Gateway	Displays the IP address of the gateway used to reach the destination network or host.
Cost	Displays the hop count metric. The valid range is from 1 to 15.

B.6.1.3.9  RIP Subtab

The RIP subtab allows you to view and configure RIP parameters.

---

Note When you enable RIP, you must wait for approximately one minute for the default RIP address summary to become visible.

---

---

Note When you disable RIP on the NE, all summary address entries in the Summary Address table will be deleted.

---

Table B-82 Field Descriptions for the RIP Subtab 

Field	Description
RIP Active	Enable or disable RIP.
RIP Type	Select RIP version 1.0 or RIP version 2.0.
Metric	Select the hop count metric. The valid range is from 1 to 15.
Authentication Type	Select the authentication type.
Authentication Key	Enter the authentication key (password) if the authentication type is Simple Password.
Confirm Authentication Key	Retype the authentication key to confirm it.
RIP Address Summary	•Summary Address—Displays the summary address. •Mask Length—Displays the subnet mask length. •Cost—Displays the hop count metric. The valid range is from 1 to 15.

B.6.1.3.10  Routing Table Subtab

The Routing Table subtab allows you to view the OSPF routing table.

Table B-83 Field Descriptions for the Routing Table Subtab 

Field	Description
Destination	Displays the IP address of the destination network or host.
Mask	Displays the subnet mask used to reach the destination host or network.
Gateway	Displays the IP address of the gateway used to reach the destination network or host.
Usage	Shows the number of times the listed route has been used.
Interface	Shows the ONS 15327 interface used to access the destination. Values are: •cpm0—The ONS 15327 Ethernet interface (that is, the RJ-45 jack on the TCC+/TCC2 and the LAN 1 pins on the backplane) •pdcc0—An SDCC interface (that is, an OC-N trunk card identified as the SDCC termination) •lo0—A loopback interface

B.6.1.3.11  Proxy Tunnels Subtab

The Proxy Tunnels subtab allows you to configure source and destination information for proxy tunnels.

Table B-84 Field Descriptions for the Proxy Tunnels Subtab 

Field	Description
Source Address	Specify the source IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.
Source Mask	Specify the source subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.
Destination Address	Specify the destination IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.
Destination Mask	Specify the destination subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.

B.6.1.3.12  Firewall Tunnels Subtab

The Firewall Tunnels subtab allows you to configure source and destination information for firewall tunnels.

Table B-85 Field Descriptions for the Firewall Tunnels Subtab 

Field	Description
Source Address	Specify the source IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.
Source Mask	Specify the source subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.
Destination Address	Specify the destination IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.
Destination Mask	Specify the destination subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.

B.6.1.4  DCC Tab

The DCC tab allows you to create, delete, and view SONET or SDH DCCs.

Table B-86 Field Descriptions for the DCC Tab 

Field	Description
SDCC Terminations	Displays the slot, port, and card type of an SDCC termination.
OSPF Disabled on Link	Check to prevent the advertisement of the OSPF routing table.
Foreign	A check mark indicates that the far-end node is a non-ONS node.
Foreign IP	Displays the foreign node IP address.
LAPD Config	If the SDCC is provisioned as OSI only, the following SDCC LAP-D parameters are displayed: •AITS/UITS—Indicates the LAP-D acknowledgement type, either AITS (Acknowledged Information Transfer Service) or UITS (Unacknowledged Transfer Service). •Network/User—Indicates the LAP-D frame command/response role, either Network or User. •MTU—Shows the size of the maximum transfer unit (MTU). The range is from 512 to 1500 octets. •T2000—Shows the time between SABME (Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode) frame transmission. The range is from 0.2 to 20 seconds. •T203—Shows the maximum time between LAP-D frame exchanges. The range is from 4 to 120 seconds.
OSI SNPA	If the SDCC is provisioned for OSI, the following subnetwork point-of-attachment (SNPA) information is displayed: •Router—Indicates the ONS router and NSAP address. •Router State—Indicates whether the router is enabled or disabled.
Service State	Select the state of the termination: •IS-NR—In Service-Normal. •OOS-AU—Out of Service-Autonomous. •OOS-MA—Out of Service-Management. •OOS-AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management. In addition, a secondary state provides additional information about the status of the entity. Values for secondary state are: •MEA—Mismatch of equipment due to invalid equipment insertion. •UEQ—Unequipped; there is nothing in the slot. •UAS—Unassigned; the entity does not exist, has not been created, or has been deleted. •SWDL—Software download in progress. •MT—Maintenance, as per the Admin State change. •AINS—Automatic in service. •DSBLD—Traffic is disabled on the entity. •LPBK—Port or connection has a loopback on it. •FLT—Fault secondary state. When an entity is faulted, an FLT state is raised. Equipment and ports in FLT state should be cleared as they transition. Transition states are listed in Table 11-10 on page 11-14. See Table 11-10 on page 11-14 for the Service state-Secondary state possible values. Note If the NE release does not support the Service state, this field shows N/A.
Create button	Allows you to create new terminations on SONET or SDH cards.
Delete button	Allows you to delete the selected termination.

B.6.1.5  Timing Tab

The Timing tab contains the following subtabs:

•General Subtab

•Reference List Subtab

•Status Subtab

•Timing Report Subtab

B.6.1.5.1  General Subtab

The General subtab displays general timing information.

Table B-87 Field Descriptions for the General Subtab 

Field	Description
General
Timing Mode	Set to External if the ONS 15327 derives its timing from a BITS source wired to the backplane pins; set to Line if timing is derived from an OC-N card that is optically connected to the timing node. A third option, Mixed, allows you to set external and line timing references. Caution Mixed timing may cause timing loops; it is recommended that you use this mode with care.
SSM Message Set	Choose the SSM set level supported by your network. SSM is a SONET protocol that communicates information about the quality of the timing source. SSM messages are carried on the S1 byte of the SONET Line layer. They enable SONET devices to automatically select the highest quality timing reference and to avoid timing loops. If a Generation 1 node receives a Generation 2 message, the message will be mapped down to the next available Generation 1. For example, an ST3E message becomes an ST3.
Revertive	If checked, the ONS 15327 reverts to a primary reference source after the conditions that caused it to switch to a secondary timing reference are corrected.
Reversion Time	Specify the reversion time in half-minute increments.
Quality of RES	If your timing source supports the reserved S1 byte, you set the timing quality here. (Most timing sources do not use RES.) Qualities are displayed in descending quality order as ranges. For example, ST3 < RES < ST2 means the timing reference is higher than a Stratum 3 and lower than a Stratum 2.
BITS-IN-OUT Facility Type
In Facility Type	Provision the BITS In facility type.
Out Facility Type	Provisions the BITS Out facility type.
BITS IN Facilities
In State	Set the BITS reference to IS (In Service) or OOS (Out of Service). For nodes set to Line timing with no equipment timed through BITS Out, set State to OOS. For nodes using External timing or Line timing with equipment timed through BITS Out, set State to IS.
Coding	Set to the coding used by your BITS reference, either B8ZS or AMI.
Framing	Set to the framing used by your BITS reference, either ESF or SF (D4). SSM is not available with Super Frame.
Sync Messaging	If checked, enables the Synchronization Status Message (SSM) for BITS In. (SSM is not available if Framing is set to Super Frame.)
Admin SSM	If the Sync Messaging check box is not checked, you can choose the SSM Generation 2 type from the drop-down list.
BITS OUT Facilities
Out State	Set the BITS reference to IS (In Service) or OOS (Out of Service). For nodes set to Line timing with no equipment timed through BITS Out, set State to OOS. For nodes using External timing or Line timing with equipment timed through BITS Out, set State to IS.
Coding	Set to the coding used by your BITS reference, either B8ZS or AMI.
Framing	Set to the framing used by your BITS reference, either ESF or SF (D4). SSM is not available with Super Frame.
AIS Threshold	If SSM is disabled or Super Frame is used, sets the quality level where a node sends an AIS from the BITS-1 Out and BITS-2 Out backplane pins. An AIS is raised when the optical source for the BITS reference falls to or below the SSM quality level defined in this field.
LBO	If you are timing an external device connected to the BITS Out pins, set the distance between it and the ONS 15327. Options are 0-133 ft. (Cisco default), 134-266 ft., 267-399 ft., 400-533 ft., and 534-655 ft.

B.6.1.5.2  Reference List Subtab

The Reference List subtab provides timing reference information.

Table B-88 Field Descriptions for the Reference List Subtab 

Field	Description
NE References	Allows you to define three timing references (Ref-1, Ref-2, Ref-3). The node uses Reference 1 unless a failure occurs on that reference, in which case, the node uses Reference 2. If that fails, the node uses Reference 3, which is typically set to Internal Clock. This is the Stratum 3 clock provided on the TCC+. The options displayed depend on the Timing Mode setting. •Timing Mode set to External—Options are BITS-1, BITS-2, and Internal Clock. •Timing Mode set to Line—Options are the node's working optical cards and Internal Clock. Select the cards/ports that are directly or indirectly connected to the node wired to the BITS source, that is, the node's trunk cards. Set Reference 1 to the trunk card that is closest to the BITS source. For example, if Slot 5 is connected to the node wired to the BITS source, select Slot 5 as Reference 1. •Timing Mode set to Mixed—Both BITS and optical cards are available, allowing you to set a mixture of external BITS and optical trunk cards as timing references.
BITS-1 Out References	Allows you to define three timing references (Ref-1, Ref-2, Ref-3) for equipment wired to the BITS Out backplane pins. Normally, BITS Out is used with line nodes, so the options displayed are the working optical cards. BITS-1 and BITS-2 Out are enabled as soon as BITS-1 and BITS-2 facilities are placed in service.
BITS-2 Out References	Allows you to define three timing references (Ref-1, Ref-2, Ref-3) for equipment wired to the BITS Out backplane pins. Normally, BITS Out is used with line nodes, so the options displayed are the working optical cards. BITS-1 and BITS-2 Out are enabled as soon as BITS-1 and BITS-2 facilities are placed in service.

B.6.1.5.3  Status Subtab

The Status subtab displays timing status information.

---

Note If you change any values in the Status subtab and click Apply at the bottom of the screen, the values are not set. Instead, use the following buttons to apply changes:

•Clear—Releases any existing switch request. For example, if you issue a Force Switch and then issue a Clear, the Force Switch request is released.

•Manual Switch—Switches the timing reference from one source to another.

•Force Switch—Switches the timing reference from one source to another. This request has a higher priority than the Manual Switch request.

---

Table B-89 Field Descriptions for the Status Subtab 

Field	Description
NE Clock
NE Reference	Set the NE timing reference to internal, BITS-1, or BITS-2.
Status	Displays the status of the NE clock.
Operations	Execute a switch on the NE timing reference.
BITS-1 Out
BITS-1 Out	Set the BITS-1 out timing reference.
Status	Displays the status of the BITS-1 out timing reference.
Operations	Execute a switch on the BITS-1 out timing reference.
BITS-2 Out
BITS-2 Out	Set the BITS-2 out timing reference.
Status	Displays the status of the BITS-2 out timing reference.
Operations	Execute a switch on the BITS-2 out timing reference.

B.6.1.5.4  Timing Report Subtab

The Timing Report subtab summarizes the NE's current timing settings.

B.6.1.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab contains the following subtabs:

•Protection Groups Subtab

•Operations Subtab

B.6.1.6.1  Protection Groups Subtab

The Protection Groups subtab displays a list of available protection groups and allows you to create, delete, and view protection groups.

Table B-90 Field Descriptions for the Protection Groups Subtab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups
Displays a list of available protection groups. Click the Create or Delete button to create a new protection group or delete an existing one.
Selected Protection Group
Name	Modify the name of the selected protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Type	View the protection type (1:1 [card], 1:N [card], Y Cable [port], or 1+1 [port]) of the selected protection group.
Protect Card	View the protect module if using 1:1 or 1:N protection.
Available Entities	Displays a list of available entities. You can toggle between available and working entities.
Working Entities	Displays a list of working entities. You can toggle between working and available entities.
Bidirectional Switching	Click if you want both the transmit and the receive channels to switch if a failure occurs on one. This option is only available if you select 1+1 (port) type.
Revertive	If checked, the node reverts traffic to the working card or port after failure conditions stay corrected for the amount of time entered in Reversion Time. This option is not available if the 1:N (card) type has been selected.
Reversion Time	If Revertive is checked, choose the amount of time following failure condition correction after which the node should switch back to the working card or port. Use half-minute increments. This option is only available if you select 1:1 (card) type.

B.6.1.6.2  Operations Subtab

The Operations subtab displays protection group operation information.

Table B-91 Field Descriptions for the Operations Subtab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection groups and allows you to execute switch commands.

B.6.1.7  Ether Bridge Tab

The Ether Bridge tab contains the following subtabs:

•Spanning Tree Config Subtab

•Spanning Tree Status Tab

B.6.1.7.1  Spanning Tree Config Subtab

The Spanning Tree Config subtab displays spanning tree configuration information for the ONS 15327.

Table B-92 Field Descriptions for the Spanning Tree Config Subtab 

Field	Description
Index Number	Unique number that identifies the spanning tree.
Priority	Incoming traffic queue. Priority can be either high or low.
Bridge Max Age	Maximum amount of time that received-protocol information is retained before it is discarded.
Bridge Hello Time	Time interval, in seconds, between the transmission of configuration bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) by a bridge that is the spanning-tree root or is attempting to become the spanning-tree root.
Bridge Forward Delay	Time spent by a port in the listening state and the learning state.

B.6.1.7.2  Spanning Tree Status Tab

The Spanning Tree Status tab displays spanning tree status information for the ONS 15327.

Table B-93 Field Descriptions for the Spanning Tree Status Tab 

Field	Description
Index Number	Unique number that identifies the spanning tree.
Bridge ID	ONS 15327 unique identifier that transmits the BPDU; the bridge ID is a combination of the bridge priority and the ONS 15327 MAC address.
Topology Age	Amount of time, in seconds, since the last topology change.
Topology Changes	Number of times the spanning-tree topology has been changed since the node booted up.
Designated Root	Spanning tree's designated root for a particular spanning-tree instance.
Root Cost	Total path cost to the designated root.
Root Port	Port used to reach the root.
Max Age	Maximum amount of time that received-protocol information is retained before it is discarded.
Hello Time	Time interval, in seconds, between the transmission of configuration BPDUs by a bridge that is the spanning-tree root or is attempting to become the spanning-tree root.
Hold Time	Minimum time period, in seconds, that elapses during the transmission of configuration information on a given port.
Forward Delay	Time spent by a port in the listening state and the learning state.

B.6.1.8  NE Defaults Tab

The NE Defaults tab displays a list of default thresholds for the ONS 15327 NE. You can edit NE defaults for the ONS 15327 R5.0 and later.

Table B-94 Field Descriptions for the NE Defaults Tab 

Field	Description
Parameter	Lists the default NE parameter.
Value	Shows the default parameter value, and allows you to change the default.
Units	Lists the unit of measure that corresponds to the default NE parameter.
Range	Lists the possible range of values for the default NE parameter. Note This field applies to the ONS 15327 R6.0 and later.
Side Effects	Lists any side effects that could occur as a result of changing the default NE parameter. Note This field applies to the ONS 15327 R6.0 and later.

You can load different NE defaults using the NE Defaults Management window. See 4.5.10  Restoring NE Defaults, page 4-78.

B.6.1.9  Security Tab

The Security tab allows you to view and edit security features for the ONS 15327 NE. The security tab contains the following subtabs:

•Policy Subtab

•Password Subtab

•Access Subtab

•RADIUS Server Subtab

•Legal Disclaimer Subtab

B.6.1.9.1  Policy Subtab

The Policy subtab allows you to specify user security parameters.

---

Note If the user is already logged in, any changes to the NE user type settings become applicable only when the user next logs in.

---

Table B-95 Field Descriptions for the Policy Subtab 

Field	Description
Idle User Timeout
Each CTC or TL1 user can be idle during his or her login session for a specified amount of time before the CTC window is locked. The lockouts prevent unauthorized users from making changes. Higher-level users have shorter default idle periods and lower-level users have longer or unlimited default idle periods. The user idle period can be modified by a SuperUser. Note A user already logged into the node is not affected by a change to the Idle User Timeout policy.
Retrieve	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC Retrieve user.
Maintenance	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC Maintenance user.
Provisioner	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC Provisioner user.
SuperUser	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC SuperUser user.
User Lockout
Manual Unlock by SuperUser	If checked, the CTC SuperUser user must manually unlock locked out CTC users. If unchecked, locked out CTC users are automatically unlocked after the lockout duration period elapses.
Lockout Duration	Set the lockout duration period for locked out CTC users. This field is only enabled if the Manual Unlock by SuperUser check box is unchecked.
Failed Logins Allowed	Set the number of failed logins before the CTC user is automatically locked out.
Other
Single Sessions per User	If checked, each CTC user can only launch one session at a time.
Disable Inactive User	If checked, inactive users are disabled automatically for the amount of time in the Inactive Duration field.
Inactive Duration	Specify the inactive duration in days. The range is from 1 to 90 days; the Cisco default is 45 days. A value of 0 implies inactive duration is disabled and invalid.

B.6.1.9.2  Password Subtab

The Password subtab allows you to specify user password security parameters.

Table B-96 Field Descriptions for the Password Subtab 

Field	Description
Password Change
Prevent Reusing Last	Prevents setting a CTC user's current password to one of the most recent passwords. You can set the number of most recent passwords that cannot be reused.
Disable Password Flipping	If checked, users are not allowed to change passwords for the number of days specified in the Cannot Change New Password For field.
Can Change Password After	Enter the number of days that must elapse before the user can change the password.
Force Password Change After Assigned	If checked, during the first successful login, the user is forced to change the password.
Password Difference	Allows SuperUsers to specify the number of characters by which the new password of a user must differ from the old password, while performing a password change. The default value is 1. The range is from 1 to 5 characters.
Password Aging
Enable Password Aging	Check this check box to enable password aging.
Aging Period	Enter the aging period, in days, for Retrieve, Maintenance, Provisioner, and SuperUser CTC users. After the aging period expires, CTC users are forced to change their passwords.
Warning Period	Enter the warning period, in days, for Retrieve, Maintenance, Provisioner, and SuperUser CTC users. After the warning period expires, CTC users are warned that their passwords will soon expire.

B.6.1.9.3  Access Subtab

The Access subtab allows you to configure LAN and shell access to the NE.

Table B-97 Field Descriptions for the Access Subtab 

Field	Description
Access
LAN Access	Specify the type of LAN access allowed. Values are Backplane Only, No LAN Access, Front and Backplane, or Front Only (for ONS 15454 SONET NEs only). Note After setting the LAN access to the backplane, the CTM client is unusable for 4 to 5 minutes.
Restore Timeout	This time period begins if LAN Access is NO and all DCC connections are lost. If the time expires before a DCC is restored, LAN Access is restored so that the node is not isolated. When the DCC comes back, LAN Access returns to its specified settings. The range is from 0 (never) to 60 minutes; the Cisco default is 5 minutes.
Shell Craft Access (available for ONS 15327 NEs R6.0 and later)
Enable Craft Port	Check this check box to enable the craft port.
Shell Access
Shell Access on	Specify shell access on Telnet or SSH.
SSH Port	Indicates the SSH port number that will be used if the SSH radio button is selected.
Telnet Port	This is enabled if you selected the Telnet radio button. Enter the Telnet port number.
Use Standard Telnet Port	If checked, the standard Telnet port is used for Telnet access.
Shell Access (available for ONS 15327 NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the Shell access state from the pull-down menu. You can select Disable, Non-secure, or Secure.
SSH Port	Indicates the SSH port number that will be used.
Telnet Port	This is enabled if you selected the Non-secure access state. Enter the Telnet port number that will be used.
Use Standard Telnet Port	Check this check box to indicate that the standard Telnet port will be used.
Enable Shell Password	Indicates whether or not the Shell password is enabled. Note You cannot enable the Shell password in CTM R6.0. Enabling and providing a Shell password is currently done in CTC.
EMS Access (available for ONS 15327 NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the EMS access state from the pull-down menu. You can select either Non-secure or Secure.
CORBA Listener Port	Select the port numbers for the XTC CORBA (IIOP) listener port and the XTC CORBA (SSLIOP) listener port. Select one of the following radio buttons: •Default-Fixed—Assigns a default port number. •Standard Constant—Port number for the XTC CORBA (IIOP) listener port will be 683. Port number for the XTC CORBA (SSLIOP) listener port will be 684. •Other Constant—When selected, enter the port number that will be used.
TL1 Access (available for ONS 15327 NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the TL1 access state from the pull-down menu. You can select Disable, Non-secure, or Secure.
SNMP Access (available for ONS 15327 NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the SNMP access state from the pull-down menu. You can select either Disable or Non-secure.
Other
PM Clearing Privilege	Select the users privilege that allows clearing PM statistics for the NE.

B.6.1.9.4  RADIUS Server Subtab

The RADIUS Server subtab allows you to configure, create, modify, and delete RADIUS servers for the ONS 15327 R6.0 and later.

Table B-98 Field Descriptions for the RADIUS Server Subtab 

Field	Description
Enable RADIUS Authentication	Check this check box to enable RADIUS authentication.
Enable RADIUS Accounting	Check this check box to enable RADIUS accounting. This is enabled if the Enable RADIUS Authentication check box is checked.
Enable the Node as the Final Authenticator When no RADIUS server is reachable	Select a row from the RADIUS Servers in Order of Authentication table; then, check this check box. This indicates that the RADIUS server that you selected will be the final authenticator when there are no more RADIUS servers that can be reached.
Create	Click this button to create a RADIUS server. See 8.4.2.1.1  Creating a RADIUS Server, page 8-50.
Edit	Click this button to modify an existing RADIUS server's information. See 8.4.2.1.2  Modifying a RADIUS Server, page 8-50.
Delete	Click this button to delete an existing RADIUS server. See 8.4.2.1.3  Deleting a RADIUS Server, page 8-50.
Move Up/Move Down	Select the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the list of RADIUS servers in the RADIUS Servers in Order of Authentication table.
RADIUS Servers in Order of Authentication
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the RADIUS server.
Shared Secret	Displays a text string that serves as a password between a RADIUS client and RADIUS server.
Authentication Port	Displays the authentication port number of the RADIUS server. Default access is through port number 1812.
Accounting Port	Displays the accounting port number of the RADIUS server. Default access is through port number 1813.

B.6.1.9.5  Legal Disclaimer Subtab

The Legal Disclaimer subtab allows you to edit the NE's advisory message and preview the disclaimer.

Table B-99 Field Descriptions for the Legal Disclaimer Subtab 

Subtab	Description
Advisory Message	The existing message is a default, noncustomer-specific disclaimer. If you want to edit this statement with specifics for your company, you can change the text. You can also use the following HTML commands to format the text: <b> Begins boldface font </b> Ends boldface font <center> Aligns type in the center of the window </center> Ends the center alignment <font=n, where n = point size> Changes the font to the new size </font> Ends the font size command <p> Creates a line break <sub> Begins subscript </sub> Ends subscript <sup> Begins superscript </sup> Ends superscript <u> Starts underline </u> Ends underline
Preview	Allows you to view the advisory message before saving it.

B.6.1.10  Alarm Tab

The Alarm tab allows you to change default alarm severities by creating unique alarm profiles for individual ONS 15327 nodes. The Alarm tab contains the following subtabs:

•Profile Subtab

•Alarm Behavior Subtab

---

Note The Alarm tab might contain default alarm profile entries for cards that are not supported by the ONS 15327. Therefore, you might see some alarms that do not apply to the NE type that you are provisioning.

---

B.6.1.10.1  Profile Subtab

The Profile subtab allows you to select, create, or delete alarm profiles.

Table B-100 Field Descriptions for the Profile Subtab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile Name	Choose an alarm profile for the NE from the drop-down list. Click Create to create a new alarm profile for the NE. Click Delete to delete an alarm profile from the NE.
Condition	Displays the alarm condition.
Severity	Displays the alarm severity.

B.6.1.10.2  Alarm Behavior Subtab

The Alarm Behavior subtab allows you to change default alarm severities by creating unique alarm profiles.

Table B-101 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Subtab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Choose a global alarm profile for the NE from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed.
Slot Number	Displays the location of the module.
Equipment Type	Displays the type of module in the slot.
Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the slot from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	Indicates whether or not the alarms for the particular card are suppressed. If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.

B.6.1.11  XC Utilization Tab

The XC Utilization tab allows you to view a summary of the percentage of XTC cross-connect resources used by circuits that traverse or terminate at an ONS 15327.

Table B-102 Field Descriptions for the XC Utilization Tab 

Field	Description
STS-1 Matrix	Provides the percentage of the XC cross-connect STS-1 paths resources that are used.
VT Matrix Ports	Provides the percentage of the XTC cross-connect VT matrix ports that are used. Each port is one STS in size, and each can transport 28 VT1.5s. 24 VT matrix ports are available.
VT Matrix	Provides the percentage of the VT matrix resources that are used. 672 are available, which is the number of VT matrix ports (24) multiplied by the number of VT1.5s in an STS (28).

B.6.1.12  BLSR Tab

The BLSR tab allows you to view BLSR information and create or delete BLSRs.

Table B-103 Field Descriptions for the BLSR Tab 

Field	Description
Fiber Type	Indicates whether the fiber type is 2-fiber or 4-fiber.
Rate	Select the BLSR rate.
Ring Name	Assign a six-digit alphanumeric ring name. Nodes in the same BLSR must have the same ring name.
Node ID	Assign a node ID. The node ID identifies the node to the BLSR. Nodes in the same BLSR must have unique node IDs.
Ring Reversion	Set the amount of time that will pass before the traffic reverts to the original working path. The Cisco default is 5 minutes. All nodes in a BLSR ring should have the same ring reversion setting, particularly if never (nonrevertive) is selected.
East Line	Assign the east BLSR port.
East Switch	Displays a list of switch commands for the east port.
West Line	Assign the west BLSR port.
West Switch	Displays a list of switch commands for the west port.

B.6.1.13  OSI Tab

The OSI tab allows you to provision ONS 15327 Open System Interconnection (OSI) parameters. It contains the following subtabs:

•Main Setup Subtab

•TARP-Config Subtab

•TARP-TDC Subtab

•TARP-MAT Subtab

•Routers-Setup Subtab

•Subnets Subtab

•Tunnels Subtab

•IS-IS RIB Subtab

•ES-IS RIB Subtab

B.6.1.13.1  Main Setup Subtab

The Main Setup subtab allows you to provision the OSI Network Entity Title (NET) address and the OSI routing mode.

Table B-104 Field Descriptions for the Main Setup Subtab 

Field	Description
Main Network Entity Title	Displays the node NET. The NET is used in OSI networks to identify the node to the end system (ES) or intermediate system (IS).
End System	Provisions the node as an OSI End System (ES). ESs send End System Hello (ESH) messages regularly to announce their presence to neighboring ISs and ESs. For the ONS 15327, End System is the default.
Intermediate System Level 1	Provisions the node as an OSI Intermediate System (IS). ISs send Intermediate System Hello (ISH) messages regularly to announce their presence to neighboring ISs and ESs.
Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2	The ONS 15327 performs all IS functions. It communicates with other IS and ES nodes within an OSI area and broadcasts ISHs to IS nodes in other areas to which it is connected.
Node Routing Mode
L1 LSP Buffer Size	Sets the Level 1 Link State Protocol (LSP) data unit buffer size. The Cisco default 512.
L2 LSP Buffer Size	Sets the Level 2 Link State Protocol (LSP) data unit buffer size. The Cisco default 512.

B.6.1.13.2  TARP-Config Subtab

The TARP Config subtab allows you to provision the TID Address Resolution protocol (TARP). TARP is used when TL1 TIDs must be translated to an NSAP address. During the TID-to-NSAP translation, the TID is mapped to a NET; then, the NSAP is derived from the NET based on the NSAP selector value.

Table B-105 Field Descriptions for the TARP-Config Subtab 

Field	Description
TARP PDUs L1 Propagation	If checked (default), TARP Type 1 PDUs received by the node that are not excluded by the loop detection buffer are propagated to other NEs within the OSI Level 1 area. Type 1 PDUs request a protocol address that matches a target TID within a Level1 routing area. The propagation does not occur if the NE is the target of the Type 1 PDU and the PDUs are not propagated to the NE from which the PDU was received. Note This parameter is not used when the node is set to End System.
TARP PDUs Origination	If checked (default), the node performs all TARP configuration functions, including: •TID-to-NSAP resolution requests •NSAP-to-TID requests •TARP address changes Note TARP Echo and NSAP to TID are not supported.
L2 TARP Data Cache	If checked (default), the TIDs and NSAPs are added to the TDC before the node propagates the requests to other NEs. Note This parameter is designed for IS Level 1/Level 2 nodes that are connected to other IS Level 1/Level 2 nodes. Enabling the parameter for IS Level 1 nodes is not recommended.
MAT 2	Lists the static manual area table entries.
LAN TARP Storm Suppression	If checked (default), enables the TARP storm suppression to prevent redundant TARP PDUs from being propagated across the network.
Type 4 PDU Delay	Sets the amount of time that will pass before the Type 4 PDU is generated. The Cisco default value is 60 seconds. The range is from 0 to 255 seconds.
TARP PDUs L2 Propagation	If checked (default), TARP Type 2 PDUs received by the node that are not excluded by the loop detection buffer are propagated to other NEs within the OSI Level 2 area. Type 2 PDUs request a protocol address that matches a target TID within a Level 2 routing area. The propagation occurs if the NE is the not the target of the Type 2 PDU and the PDUs are not propagated to the NE from which the PDU was received.
L1 TARP Data Cache	If checked, the node maintains a TARP data cache (TDC). The TDC is a database of TID to NSAP pairs created from TARP Type 3 PDUs received by the node. TARP 3 PDUs are responses to Type 1 and Type 2 PDUs and modified by TARP Type 4 PDUs (TID to NSAP updates or corrections).
MAT 1	Lists the static manual area table entries.
LDB	If checked, enables the TARP loop detection buffer (LDB). The LDB prevents TARP PDUs from being sent more than once on the same subnet.
Send Type 4 PDU on Startup	If checked, a TARP Type 4 PDU is originated during the initial ONS 15327 startup. Type 4 PDUs indicate a TID or NSAP change has occurred at the NE. This is disabled by default.
Timers
LDB Entry	Sets the TARP LDB timer. The LDB buffer time is assigned to each LDB entry for which the TARP sequence number is zero. The Cisco default is 5 minutes. The range is from 1 to 10 minutes.
T1 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for response to a Type 1 Request PDU. Type 1 requests seek a specific NE TID within an OSI Level 1 area. The Cisco default is 15 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.
T3 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for an address resolution request. The Cisco default is 40 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.
LDB Flush	Sets the frequency period for flushing the LDB. The Cisco default is 5 minutes. The range is from 0 to 1440 minutes.
T2 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for a Type 2 Request PDU. TARP Type 2 requests seek a specific NE TID within an OSI Level 1 area. The Cisco default is 25 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.
T4 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for an error recovery. The timer begins after the T2 timer expires without successfully finding the NE TID. The Cisco default is 20 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.

B.6.1.13.3  TARP-TDC Subtab

Table B-106 Field Descriptions for the TARP-TDC Subtab 

Field	Description
TID	Target ID that is statistically linked to an NSAP or NET. For ONS nodes, the TID is the node name.
NSAP/NET	The NSAP that is statistically linked to the TID.
Type	Indicates how the TARP data cache entry was created. It can be either: •Dynamic—The entry was created through the TARP propagation process. •Static—The entry was manually created and is a static entry.
Add Static Entry button	Click this button to statically link a TID to an NSAP or NET.
Delete Selected Entry button	Click this button to delete the selected TID to NSAP/NET static entry.
TID to NSAP	Click this button to query the network for an NSAP that matches a TID.
Flush Dynamic Entries	Click this button to delete all dynamically generated TDC entries.

B.6.1.13.4  TARP-MAT Subtab

The TARP-MAT subtab allows you to manually provision a TARP adjacency.

Table B-107 Field Descriptions for the TARP-MAT Subtab 

Field	Description
Level	Sets the TARP Type Code that will be sent. •Level 1—Indicates that the manual area adjacency is within the same area as the node. The entry generates Type 1 PDUs. •Level 2—Indicates that the manual area adjacency is in an area different from the node. The entry generates Type 2 PDUs.
NSAP	The NSAP address of the node at the other end of the TARP manual adjacency.
Add	Click this button to create a TARP manual area adjacency.
Remove	Deletes the selected TID to NSAP/NET static entry.

B.6.1.13.5  Routers-Setup Subtab

The Routers-Setup subtab allows you to view and manage the OSI virtual routers.

Table B-108 Field Descriptions for the Routers-Setup Subtab 

Field	Description
Router Number	Displays the virtual router number. Only one router is available on the ONS 15327.
System ID	Displays the NSAP system ID of the virtual router. For the primary router (Router 1), n = 0.
Status	Indicates the virtual router status. Select Enabled or Disabled from the drop-down menu. Note Router 1 must be enabled before additional routers can be enabled.
Primary Area Address	Indicates the primary manual area address. For Router 1, this is the main NET for the node; that is, the NSAP without the system ID and selector (set to 00) fields.
Manual Area Address 1	Indicates the address of any additional manual areas that are created. Note An OSI area allows up to two additional manual areas in addition to the primary manual area.
Manual Area Address 2	Indicates the address of any additional manual areas that are created. Note An OSI area allows up to two additional manual areas in addition to the primary manual area.

B.6.1.13.6  Subnets Subtab

The Subnets subtab allows you to view and manage OSI subnetwork point-of-attachment parameters. The parameters are initially provisioned when you enable a subnet on an SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, or LAN interface.

Table B-109 Field Descriptions for the Subnets Subtab 

Field	Description
Router Number	The OSI virtual router where the subnet (SDCC, LDCC, GCC, or OSC) is provisioned.
Slot/Port	The subnet slot and port.
Type	The interface where the subnet is provisioned: SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, or LAN.
Protocol	The data link protocol that is provisioned for the subnet. It can be: •Point to Point Protocol (PPP) •Link Access Protocol on the D channel (LAP-D) •802.3 for LAN subnets
ISH	The Intermediate System Hello (ISH) PDU propagation frequency. Intermediate system NEs send ISHs to other ESs and ISs to inform them about the NETs they serve. The Cisco default is 10 seconds. The range is from 10 to 1000 seconds.
ESH	The End System Hello (ESH) PDU propagation frequency. End system NEs transmit ESHs to inform other ESs and ISs about the NSAPs they serve. The Cisco default is 10 seconds. The range is from 10 to 1000 seconds.
IIH	The Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System Hello (IIH) PDU propagation frequency. The IS-IS Hello PDUs establish and maintain adjacencies between ISs. The Cisco default is 3 seconds. The range is from 1 to 600 seconds.
DisPriority	The designated intermediate system (DIS) priority. In IS-IS networks, one router is elected as the DIS. For Cisco routers, the DIS priority is 64.
IS-IS Cost	The cost for sending packets on the subnet. This is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. The Cisco default value is 20.
Enable LAN Subnet button	(Router 1 only). Enables OSI over the LAN; that is, it activates the IS-IS protocol on the LAN so OSI traffic is enabled on the LAN.
Edit button	Click Edit to modify subnet parameters.
Disable LAN Subnet	(Router 1 only). Disables OSI over the LAN if it has been enabled.

B.6.1.13.7  Tunnels Subtab

The Tunnels subtab allows you to view, create, edit, and delete Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) and Cisco tunnels. GRE tunnels encapsulate one network protocol for transfer across another network layer. Within a mixed TCP/IP and OSI network, GRE tunnels tunnel IP traffic over an OSI NE and OSI traffic over an IP NE.

Table B-110 Field Descriptions for the Tunnels Subtab 

Field	Description
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the GRE destination CTM or CTC computer.
NetMask Address	Displays the IP address subnet mask of the destination CTM or CTC computer.
NSAP Address	The destination NE NSAP address. The NSAP selector (last two NSAP characters) must be 2f (GRE tunnel) or cc (proprietary Cisco tunnel), depending on which tunnel type you want to create. The Cisco proprietary tunnel is slightly more efficient than the GRE tunnel because it does not add an encapsulation header for each IP packet, while the GRE tunnel adds a small header to the packets. The two tunnel types are incompatible. Note Most Cisco routers support the Cisco tunnel, while only a few support both GRE and Cisco IP tunnels.
OSPF Metric	Displays the cost for sending packets across the GRE tunnel. Cost is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path.
Create	Click Create to create a new GRE tunnel route.
Edit	Click Edit to edit an existing GRE tunnel.
Delete	Click Delete to delete an existing GRE tunnel.

B.6.1.13.8  IS-IS RIB Subtab

The IS-IS RIB subtab allows you to view the Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System protocol routing information base. IS-IS is an OSI link-state hierarchical routing protocol that floods the network with link-state information that enables the NEs to build a complete and consistent picture of a network topology.

Table B-111 Field Descriptions for the IS-IS RIB Subtab 

Field	Description
Router Number	Displays the virtual router number. Only one router is available on the ONS 15327.
Subnet Type	Indicates the OSI subnetwork point-of-attachment type used to access the destination address. It includes SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, and LAN.
Destination Address	Displays the Network Service Access Point (NSAP).
MAC Address	Displays the NE's Media Access Control (MAC) address for destinations that are accessed by the LAN subnets.

B.6.1.13.9  ES-IS RIB Subtab

The ES-IS RIB subtab allows you to view the End System to Intermediate System (ES-IS) protocol routing information base (RIB). ES-IS is an OSI protocol that defines how end systems (hosts) and intermediate systems (routers) learn about each other.

Table B-112 Field Descriptions for the ES-IS RIB Subtab 

Field	Description
Router Number	Displays the virtual router number. Only one router is available on the ONS 15327.
Subnet Type	Indicates the OSI subnetwork point-of-attachment type used to access the destination address. It includes SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, and LAN.
Destination Address	Displays the Network Service Access Point (NSAP) of the destination ES.
MAC Address	Displays the NE's Media Access Control (MAC) address for destinations that are accessed by the LAN subnets.

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.7  ONS 15454 SONET NE Explorer

When you choose Configuration > NE Explorer for the ONS 15454 SONET, the window displayed by CTM consists of a tree on the left side and a node properties pane on the right. (See Figure B-12.) The tree provides a hierarchical view and alarm status of the NE's physical shelves and slots. The properties pane shows information about the selected entity (NE or slot). See Node Properties Pane—ONS 15454 SONET for more information.

Figure B-12 NE Explorer—ONS 15454 SONET

---

Note If CTC is launched from the web browser for an ONS 15454 SONET node, the CTC GUI might look different from when it is launched from CTM. This discrepancy occurs because the latest version of CTC (for NE releases supported by CTM) is packaged with CTM. If launched from a browser, the CTC software is retrieved from the NE itself, which might be a version different from that packaged with CTM.

---

When an NE Explorer is in autorefresh mode, all values of an entity that is being edited by the user are automatically refreshed. You will lose all of your changes unless you click the Apply button. To enable autorefresh, click the Refresh Data button in the NE Explorer.

B.7.1  Node Properties Pane—ONS 15454 SONET

The node properties pane displays information about the ONS 15454 SONET NE. The ONS 15454 SONET properties pane contains the following tabs, some of which apply only to a specific NE version:

•Shelf View Tab

•Identification Tab

•Network Tab

•DCC/GCC/OSC Tab

•Timing Tab

•Protection Tab

•Ether Bridge Tab

•NE Defaults Tab

•Security Tab

•Alarm Tab

•XC Utilization Tab

•BLSR Tab

•DWDM Tab

•OSI Tab

B.7.1.1  Shelf View Tab

The Shelf View tab displays a graphic of the ONS 15454 SONET that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Moving the mouse pointer over the NE, its shelves, slots, or cards displays the current alarms for the shelf, slot, or card. Double-clicking a slot or card displays the slot or card in the properties pane. The right-click menu allows you to reset, delete, or change a card. For unprovisioned slots, the right-click menu allows you to add a card.

B.7.1.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays information about the ONS 15454 SONET NE.

Table B-113 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the ID of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
Description	Displays the description of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
NE Model	Displays the NE model type.
Software Version	Displays the current running version of the system software.
Contact	Displays the name and phone number of the node contact person.
System Description	Displays a description of the NE.
SNTP Settings
Use NTP/SNTP Server	If checked, CTC uses an SNTP server to set the date and time of the node. Using an SNTP server ensures that all ONS 15454 network nodes use the same date and time reference. The server synchronizes the node's time after power outages or software upgrades. If you check the Use NTP/SNTP Server check box, enter the server's IP address in the next field. If you do not use an SNTP server, complete the Time and Time Zone fields. The ONS 15454 will use these fields for alarm dates and times.
SNTP Server	Displays the SNTP server IP address.
Location
Latitude	Allows you to set the latitude of the NE. Select North or South from the drop-down list; then, enter the degrees and minutes (or click the up and down arrows to increase or decrease each by 1 unit).
Longitude	Allows you to set the longitude of the NE. Select East or West from the drop-down list; then, enter the degrees and minutes (or click the up and down arrows to increase or decrease each by 1 unit).
Date and Time
Time	Displays the NE date and time.
Time Zone	Displays the time zone where the NE is located.
Use Daylight Savings Time	If checked, Daylight Savings Time is observed.
AIS-V Insertion on STS-1 Signal Degrade - Path
Insert AIS-V on STS-1 SD-P	If checked, the NE inserts an AIS-V signal when it detects an STS-1 signal degrade.
SD-P BER	Select the signal degrade path bit error rate for AIS-V insertion.
APC Group Name
APC State	Allows you to view the automatic power control state.
Voltage Thresholds
ELWBATVG	Allows you to set the monitor value for extreme low battery voltage (ELWBATVG) in volts direct current (VDC).
LWBATVG	Allows you to set the monitor value for low battery voltage (LWBATVG) in VDC.
HIBATVG	Allows you to set the monitor value for high battery voltage (HIBATVG) in VDC.
EHIBATVG	Allows you to set the monitor value for extreme high battery voltage (EHIBATVG) in VDC.
Current Voltage Environment	Shows the current voltage environment (48 volts for SONET; 60 volts for SDH).

B.7.1.3  Network Tab

The Network tab displays information about the NE network address. The Network tab contains the following subtabs:

Address Subtab

Static Routes Subtab

OSPF Subtab

OSPF Area Range Subtab

OSPF Virtual Links Subtab

SNMP Subtab

Firewall/Proxy Subtab

Routing Table Subtab

RIP Routing Table Subtab

RIP Subtab

Proxy Tunnels Subtab

Firewall Tunnels Subtab

Secure Config Mode Subtab

B.7.1.3.1  Address Subtab

The Address subtab allows you to view and change information about the NE network address.

Table B-114 Field Descriptions for the Address Subtab 

Field	Description
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the NE.
Default Router	Displays the IP address of the default router.
Subnet Mask	Displays the subnetwork mask ID of the NE.
MAC Address	Displays the ONS 15454 address as it is identified on the IEEE 802 MAC layer.
LCD IP Setting	Allows you to configure the LCD screen. Select Allow Configuration to enable shelf address changing from the LCD. Select Display Only to prevent users from changing the shelf IP address from the LCD screen. Select Suppress Display to make the LCD screen blank.
Forward DHCP Requests	If checked, forwards DHCP requests to the IP address entered in the DHCP Server field. When the Forward DHCP Requests check box is unchecked, the field is read-only.
DHCP Server	Displays the IP address of the DHCP server.

B.7.1.3.2  Static Routes Subtab

The Static Routes subtab allows you to view information about CTM and ONS 15454 SONET connectivity and create or delete static routes.

Table B-115 Field Descriptions for the Static Routes Subtab 

Field	Description
Destination IP	Displays the IP address of the computer running CTM.
Subnet Mask	Displays the subnetwork mask.
Next Hop	Displays the IP address of the router port or the node IP address if the CTM computer is connected to the node directly.
Cost	Displays the number of hops between the ONS 15454 and the computer.

B.7.1.3.3  OSPF Subtab

The OSPF subtab displays OSPF information. OSPF is a link state Internet routing protocol.

Table B-116 Field Descriptions for the OSPF Subtab 

Field	Description
Slot	Displays the slot number.
Port	Displays the port number.
DCC OSPF Area ID	Displays the number that identifies the ONS 15454 as a unique OSPF area. The OSPF area number can be from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The number must be unique to the LAN OSPF area.
SDCC Metric	Sets a cost for sending packets across the Section Data Communications Channel (SDCC), which is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. This value should always be higher than the LAN metric. This value is normally unchanged.
LDCC Metric	Sets a cost for sending packets across the Line Data Communications Channel (LDCC), which is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. This value should always be higher than the LAN metric. This value is normally unchanged.
OSPF Active on LAN	If checked, enables the ONS 15454 OSPF topology to be advertised to OSPF routers on the LAN. Enable this field on ONS 15454s that directly connect to OSPF routers.
LAN Port Area ID	Displays the OSPF area ID for the router port where the ONS 15454 is connected. (This number is different from the DCC OSPF area ID.)
Router Priority	Displays the value used for this NE in designated router election. The Cisco default value is zero (0). A router that has Router Priority set to 0 is ineligible to become a designated router on the attached network.
Dead Interval	Displays the number of seconds that will pass while an OSPF router's packets are not visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the Cisco default.
Retransmit Interval	Displays the time that will elapse before a packet is resent. Five seconds is the Cisco default.
Hello Interval	Displays the number of seconds between OSPF hello packet advertisements sent by OSPF routers. Ten seconds is the Cisco default.
Transit Delay	Displays the service speed. One second is the Cisco default.
LAN Metric	Displays a cost for sending packets across the LAN. This value should always be lower than the DCC metric. Ten is the Cisco default.
Authentication Type	Displays Simple Password if the router where the ONS 15454 is connected uses authentication. Otherwise, it displays No Authentication.
Authentication Key	Displays the OSPF key (password) if authentication is enabled.
Confirm Authentication Key	Retype the authentication key to confirm it.

B.7.1.3.4  OSPF Area Range Subtab

The OSPF Area Range subtab allows you to view information about OSPF area ranges and create or delete area ranges.

Table B-117 Field Descriptions for the OSPF Area Range Subtab 

Field	Description
Range Address	Displays the area IP address for the ONS 15454s that reside within the OSPF area. For example, if the ONS 15454 OSPF area includes nodes with IP addresses 10.10.20.100, 10.10.30.150, 10.10.40.200, and 10.10.50.250, the range address would be 10.10.0.0.
Range Area ID	Displays the OSPF area ID for the ONS 15454s. This is either the ID in the DCC OSPF Area ID field or the ID in the Area ID for LAN Port field.
Mask Length	Displays the subnet mask length.
Mask	Displays the subnet mask IP address.
Advertise	Indicates whether the OSPF routing table is advertised.

B.7.1.3.5  OSPF Virtual Links Subtab

The OSPF Virtual Links subtab allows you to view information about OSPF virtual links and create, edit, or delete virtual links.

---

Note You cannot create a new virtual link unless OSPF is active on the LAN.

---

Table B-118 Field Descriptions for the OSPF Virtual Links Subtab 

Field	Description
Neighbor	Displays the router ID of the Area 0 router.
Transit Delay	Displays the service speed. One second is the Cisco default.
Retransmit Interval	Displays the time that will elapse before a packet is resent. Five seconds is the Cisco default.
Hello Interval	Displays the number of seconds between OSPF hello packet advertisements sent by OSPF routers. Ten seconds is the Cisco default.
Dead Interval	Displays the number of seconds that will pass while the packets of an OSPF router are not visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the Cisco default.
Authentication Type	Displays the authentication type.
Authentication Key	Displays the authentication key.

B.7.1.3.6  SNMP Subtab

The SNMP subtab allows you to view SNMP information and create or delete SNMP trap destinations.

Table B-119 Field Descriptions for the SNMP Subtab 

Field	Description
Allow SNMP Set	If checked, allows you to use SNMP management software with the ONS 15454.
Allow SNMP Proxy	If checked, allows you to configure the ONS 15454 to proxy SNMP calls.
IP Address	The IP address of the NMS.
Community Name	The SNMP community name. Note The SNMP community string cannot be blank in CTM. If a blank community string is required in CTC builds earlier than R4.6, you must set the blank community string in CTC.
UDP Port	The UDP port for SNMP. The Cisco default UDP port is 162.
Trap Version	The trap version, either SNMP version 1 or version 2. See your NMS documentation to determine whether to use SNMP version 1 or version 2.
Relay A IP Address	The first ONS 15454 to relay traps through. The IP address is appended to the base community string to tell the first NE that is relaying the trap the IP address and port to forward the trap to. The second NE recognizes the IP address and strips it from the community string before forwarding the trap.
Relay A Community Name	The community name for the relay A node to use in the trap when forwarding it.
Relay B IP Address	The second ONS 15454 to relay traps through.
Relay B Community Name	The community name for the relay B node to use in the trap when forwarding it.
Relay C IP Address	The third ONS 15454 to relay traps through.
Relay C Community Name	The community name for the relay C node to use in the trap when forwarding it.

B.7.1.3.7  Firewall/Proxy Subtab

The Firewall/Proxy subtab allows you to use an NE as a proxy server and/or as a firewall.

Table B-120 Field Descriptions for the Firewall/Proxy Subtab 

Field	Description
Craft Access Only	If checked, only allows CTC to access the firewall and proxy settings of the NE. Check this item only if the LAN port is used for direct workstation-to-NE connections, and not connected to a LAN. Disabling craft-only access allows the installation of a route to the LAN. Disable this only if the LAN port is actually connected to the LAN. Note This field applies only to ONS 15454 SONET releases earlier than R4.6.
Enable Firewall	If checked, blocks packets routed between the local area and DCC networks. This causes a loss of connectivity to DCC-only connected NEs. CTM cannot reestablish the connection unless the proxy is enabled. Additionally, all NEs connected to the LAN must also have their firewall enabled, or connectivity problems will result. Note This field applies only to ONS 15454 SONET releases earlier than R4.6.
Gateway Settings
Enable Proxy Server on Port	If checked, the ONS 15454 serves as a proxy for connections between the CTM server and ONS 15454s that are DCC-connected to the proxy ONS 15454. The CTM server establishes connections to DCC-connected nodes through the proxy node. The CTM server can connect to nodes that it cannot directly reach from the host on which it runs. The proxy server port number (read-only) is displayed following the Enable Proxy Server on Port field. The proxy server uses port number 1080. If checked, the following radio buttons are enabled: •External Network Element (ENE)—Configures the ONS 15454 to proxy as an ENE, meaning the NE supports craft access only, supports firewall, and acts as a proxy. •Gateway Network Element (GNE)—Configures the ONS 15454 to proxy as a GNE, meaning the NE supports firewall and acts as a proxy. •Proxy-only—Configures the ONS 15454 to act as a proxy. If unchecked, the node does not proxy; instead, it acts as a LAN-connected NE (LNE).

B.7.1.3.8  Routing Table Subtab

The Routing Table subtab allows you to view the OSPF routing table.

Table B-121 Field Descriptions for the Routing Table Subtab 

Field	Description
Destination	Displays the IP address of the destination network or host.
Mask	Displays the subnet mask used to reach the destination host or network.
Gateway	Displays the IP address of the gateway used to reach the destination network or host.
Usage	Shows the number of times the listed route has been used.
Interface	Shows the ONS 15454 interface used to access the destination. Values are: •cpm0—The ONS 15454 Ethernet interface (that is, the RJ-45 jack on the TCC+/TCC2 and the LAN 1 pins on the backplane) •pdcc0—An SDCC interface (that is, an OC-N trunk card identified as the SDCC termination) •lo0—A loopback interface

B.7.1.3.9  RIP Routing Table Subtab

The RIP Routing Table subtab allows you to view the RIP routing table.

Table B-122 Field Descriptions for the RIP Routing Table Subtab 

Field	Description
Destination	Displays the IP address of the destination network or host.
Mask	Displays the subnet mask used to reach the destination host or network.
Gateway	Displays the IP address of the gateway used to reach the destination network or host.
Cost	Displays the hop count metric. The valid range is from 1 to 15.

B.7.1.3.10  RIP Subtab

The RIP subtab allows you to view and configure RIP parameters.

---

Note When you enable RIP, you must wait for approximately one minute for the default RIP address summary to become visible.

---

---

Note When you disable RIP on the NE, all summary address entries in the Summary Address table will be deleted.

---

Table B-123 Field Descriptions for the RIP Subtab 

Field	Description
RIP Active	Check this check box to enable or disable RIP.
RIP Type	Select RIP version 1.0 or RIP version 2.0.
Metric	Select the hop count metric. The valid range is from 1 to 15.
Authentication Type	Select the authentication type.
Authentication Key	Enter the authentication key (password) if the authentication type is Simple Password.
Confirm Authentication Key	Retype the authentication key to confirm it.
RIP Address Summary	•Summary Address—Displays the summary address. •Mask Length—Displays the subnet mask length. •Cost—Displays the hop count metric. The valid range is from 1 to 15.

B.7.1.3.11  Proxy Tunnels Subtab

The Proxy Tunnels subtab allows you to configure source and destination information for proxy tunnels.

Table B-124 Field Descriptions for the Proxy Tunnels Subtab 

Field	Description
Source Address	Specify the source IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.
Source Mask	Specify the source subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.
Destination Address	Specify the destination IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.
Destination Mask	Specify the destination subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.

B.7.1.3.12  Firewall Tunnels Subtab

The Firewall Tunnels subtab allows you to configure source and destination information for firewall tunnels.

Table B-125 Field Descriptions for the Firewall Tunnels Subtab 

Field	Description
Source Address	Specify the source IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.
Source Mask	Specify the source subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.
Destination Address	Specify the destination IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.
Destination Mask	Specify the destination subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.

B.7.1.3.13  Secure Config Mode Subtab

The TCC2P card supports secure config mode. When the secure mode is ON, the NE has two IP addresses, one for the backplane and one for the front port. The front port IP address is used by the DCC-connected NEs. The secure config mode feature applies to the ONS 15454 SONET R5.0 and later.

---

Note When there is no TCC2P card present, the fields in Table B-126 cannot be configured.

---

The Secure Config Mode subtab allows you to configure the secure config mode. The fields shown depend on whether the NE is in secure mode. For example, the Backplane Ethernet Port values are displayed only when the NE is in secure mode.

Table B-126 Field Descriptions for the Secure Config Mode Subtab 

Field	Description
TCP/IP Mode
Normal	When this text is visible, the NE is not in secure mode. There is one IP address shared by TCC and backplane Ethernet ports, with full connectivity between ports.
Secure	When this text is visible, the NE is in secure mode. There are separate IP addresses for TCC and backplane Ethernet ports, with no connectivity between ports.
Mode not locked	When this text is visible, you can change the secure mode.
Mode permanently locked and cannot be unlocked	When this text is visible, the NE is in secure mode, and the secure mode is locked and cannot be changed.
Backplane Ethernet Port
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the NE.
Secure IP Address	Displays the backplane IP address.
Secure Subnet Mask Length	Displays the mask length of the secure IP address. Use the up or down arrows to change the mask length.
Default Router	Displays the address of the default router for this NE.
Secure MAC Address	Displays the MAC/Ethernet address for the backplane.
Secure LCD IP Setting	Displays the setting value applicable for the secure mode. Values are: •Display Only •Suppress Display •Allow Configuration
Change Mode
Change Mode button	Opens the Change Secure Mode dialog box, which allows you to change the mode of the NE from secure to unsecure, and vice versa. This button is enabled only if an active TCC2P card exists on the NE.
Lock
Lock button	When the NE is in secure mode, the Lock button locks the secure mode on the NE/TCC so that it cannot be changed.

B.7.1.4  DCC/GCC/OSC Tab

The DCC/GCC/OSC tab allows you to create, delete, and view SDCCs, LDCCs, Generic Communications Channels (GCCs), Optical Service Channels (OSCs), and DWDM ring IDs.

Table B-127 Field Descriptions for the DCC/GCC/OSC Tab 

Field	Description
SDCC
SDCC Terminations	Displays the slot, port, and card type of an SDCC termination.
OSPF Disabled on Link	Check to prevent the advertisement of the OSPF routing table.
Foreign	A check mark indicates that the far-end node is a non-ONS node.
Foreign IP	Displays the foreign node IP address.
LAPD Config	If the SDCC is provisioned as OSI only, the following SDCC LAP-D parameters are displayed: •AITS/UITS—Indicates the LAP-D acknowledgement type, either AITS (Acknowledged Information Transfer Service) or UITS (Unacknowledged Transfer Service). •Network/User—Indicates the LAP-D frame command/response role, either Network or User. •MTU—Shows the size of the maximum transfer unit (MTU). The range is from 512 to 1500 octets. •T2000—Shows the time between SABME (Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode) frame transmission. The range is from 0.2 to 20 seconds. •T203—Shows the maximum time between LAP-D frame exchanges. The range is from 4 to 120 seconds.
OSI SNPA	If the SDCC is provisioned for OSI, the following subnetwork point-of-attachment (SNPA) information is displayed: •Router—Indicates the ONS router and NSAP address. •Router State—Indicates whether the router is enabled or disabled.
Service State	Select the state of the termination: •IS-NR—In Service-Normal. •OOS-AU—Out of Service-Autonomous. •OOS-MA—Out of Service-Management. •OOS-AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management. In addition, a secondary state provides additional information about the status of the entity. Values for secondary state are: •MEA—Mismatch of equipment due to invalid equipment insertion. •UEQ—Unequipped; there is nothing in the slot. •UAS—Unassigned; the entity does not exist, has not been created, or has been deleted. •SWDL—Software download in progress. •MT—Maintenance, as per the Admin State change. •AINS—Automatic in service. •DSBLD—Traffic is disabled on the entity. •LPBK—Port or connection has a loopback on it. •FLT—Fault secondary state. When an entity is faulted, an FLT state is raised. Equipment and ports in FLT state should be cleared as they transition. Transition states are listed in Table 11-10 on page 11-14. See Table 11-10 on page 11-14 for the Service state-Secondary state possible values. Note If the NE release does not support the Service state, this field shows N/A.
LDCC
LDCC Terminations	Displays the slot, port, and card type of an LDCC termination.
OSPF Disabled on Link	Check to prevent the advertisement of the OSPF routing table.
Foreign	A check mark indicates that the far-end node is a non-ONS node.
Foreign IP	Displays the foreign node IP address.
LAPD Config	Displays the LAP-D parameters for the SDCCs that are provisioned as OSI only. For GCCs, this column is always N/A.
OSI SNPA	If the GCC is provisioned for OSI, the following SNPA information is displayed: •Router—Indicates the ONS router and NSAP address. •Router State—Indicates whether the router is enabled or disabled.
Service State	Select the state of the LDCC termination (IS-NR, OOS-AU, OOS-MA, OOS-AUMA) plus the secondary state (MEA, UEQ, UAS, SWDL, MT, AINS, DSBLD, LPBK).
GCC
GCC Terminations	Displays the slot, port, and card type of a GCC termination.
OSPF Disabled on Link	Check to prevent the advertisement of the OSPF routing table.
GCC Rate	Displays the GCC rate.
Foreign	A check mark indicates that the far-end node is a non-ONS node.
Foreign IP	Displays the foreign node IP address.
LAPD Config	Displays the LAP-D parameters for the SDCCs that are provisioned as OSI only. For GCCs, this column is always N/A.
OSI SNPA	If the GCC is provisioned for OSI, the following SNPA information is displayed: •Router—Indicates the ONS router and NSAP address. •Router State—Indicates whether the router is enabled or disabled.
Service State	Select the state of the GCC termination (IS-NR, OOS-AU, OOS-MA, OOS-AUMA) plus the secondary state (MEA, UEQ, UAS, SWDL, MT, AINS, DSBLD, LPBK).
OSC
OSC Terminations	Displays the slot, port, and card type of an OSC termination.
LAPD Config	Displays the LAP-D parameters for the SDCCs that are provisioned as OSI only.
OSI SNPA	If the OSC is provisioned for OSI, the following SNPA information is displayed: •Router—Indicates the ONS router and NSAP address. •Router State—Indicates whether the router is enabled or disabled.
Service State	Displays the state of the OSC termination.
DWDM Ring ID
Ring ID	Displays the ring ID.
West Direction	Lists the OSCM or OSC-CSM port that supports the ring in the west direction. The value is N/A if there are no ports in the west direction.
East Direction	Lists the OSCM or OSC-CSM port that supports the ring in the east direction. The value is N/A if there are no ports in the east direction.
Create button	Allows you to create new terminations on SONET or SDH cards.
Edit button	Allows you to modify existing terminations on SONET or SDH cards.
Delete button	Allows you to delete the selected SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, or DWDM ring ID.

B.7.1.4.1  DCC Tunnel Connection Subtab

---

Note Release 3.3 and earlier of the ONS 15454 also display an additional subtab for DCC tunnel connection information.

---

The DCC Tunnel Connection subtab allows you to create, delete, and view DCC tunnel connections.

Table B-128 DCC Tunnel Connection Subtab 

Field	Description
Interface A	Displays the A interface for the DCC tunnel.
DCC A	Displays the A DCC for the DCC tunnel.
Interface B	Displays the B interface for the DCC tunnel.
DCC B	Displays the B DCC for the DCC tunnel.

B.7.1.5  Timing Tab

The Timing tab contains the following subtabs:

•General Subtab

•Reference List Subtab

•Status Subtab

•Timing Report Subtab

B.7.1.5.1  General Subtab

The General subtab displays general timing information.

Table B-129 Field Descriptions for the General Subtab 

Field	Description
Timing Mode	Set to External if the ONS 15454 derives its timing from a BITS source wired to the backplane pins; set to Line if timing is derived from an OC-N card that is optically connected to the timing node. A third option, Mixed, allows you to set external and line timing references. Caution Mixed timing might cause timing loops; it is recommended that you use this mode with care.
SSM Message Set	Choose the SSM set level supported by your network. SSM is a SONET protocol that communicates information about the quality of the timing source. SSM messages are carried on the S1 byte of the SONET Line layer. They enable SONET devices to automatically select the highest quality timing reference and to avoid timing loops. If a Generation 1 node receives a Generation 2 message, the message will be mapped down to the next available Generation 1. For example, an ST3E message becomes an ST3.
Revertive	If checked, the ONS 15454 reverts to a primary reference source after the conditions that caused it to switch to a secondary timing reference are corrected. Use the Reversion Time field to specify the time in half-minute increments.
Quality of RES	If your timing source supports the reserved S1 byte, set the timing quality here. (Most timing sources do not use RES.) Qualities are displayed in descending quality order as ranges. For example, ST3 < RES < ST2 means the timing reference is higher than a Stratum 3 and lower than a Stratum 2.
In Facility Type	Provision the BITS In facility type.
Out Facility Type	Provisions the BITS Out facility type.
In State/Out State	Set the BITS reference to IS (In Service) or OOS (Out of Service). For nodes set to Line timing with no equipment timed through BITS Out, set the state to OOS. For nodes using External timing or Line timing with equipment timed through BITS Out, set the state to IS.
Coding	Set to the coding used by your BITS reference, either B8ZS or AMI.
Framing	Set to the framing used by your BITS reference, either ESF or SF (D4). SSM is not available with Super Frame.
Sync Messaging	If checked, enables the Synchronization Status Message (SSM) for BITS In. (SSM is not available if Framing is set to Super Frame.)
Admin. SSM	If the Sync Messaging check box is not checked, you can choose the SSM Generation 2 type from the drop-down list.
AIS Threshold	If SSM is disabled or Super Frame is used, sets the quality level where a node sends an AIS from the BITS-1 Out and BITS-2 Out backplane pins. An AIS is raised when the optical source for the BITS reference falls to or below the SSM quality level defined in this field.
LBO	If you are timing an external device connected to the BITS Out pins, set the distance between it and the ONS 15454. Options are 0-133 ft. (Cisco default), 134-266 ft., 267-399 ft., 400-533 ft., and 534-655 ft.

B.7.1.5.2  Reference List Subtab

The Reference List subtab provides timing reference information.

Table B-130 Field Descriptions for the Reference List Subtab 

Field	Description
NE References	Allows you to define three timing references (Ref-1, Ref-2, Ref-3). The node uses Reference 1 unless a failure occurs on that reference, in which case, the node uses Reference 2. If that fails, the node uses Reference 3, which is typically set to the internal clock. This is the Stratum 3 clock provided on the TCC+. The options displayed depend on the Timing Mode setting. •Timing Mode set to External—Options are BITS-1, BITS-2, and Internal. •Timing Mode set to Line—Options are the node's working optical cards and Internal. Select the cards/ports that are directly or indirectly connected to the node wired to the BITS source; that is, the node's trunk cards. Set Reference 1 to the trunk card that is closest to the BITS source. For example, if Slot 5 is connected to the node wired to the BITS source, select Slot 5 as Reference 1. •Timing Mode set to Mixed—Both BITS and optical cards are available, allowing you to set a mixture of external BITS and optical trunk cards as timing references.
BITS-1 Out References	Allows you to define three timing references (Ref-1, Ref-2, Ref-3) for equipment wired to the BITS Out backplane pins. Normally, BITS Out is used with line nodes, so the options displayed are the working optical cards. BITS-1 and BITS-2 Out are enabled as soon as BITS-1 and BITS-2 facilities are placed in service.
BITS-2 Out References	Allows you to define three timing references (Ref-1, Ref-2, Ref-3) for equipment wired to the BITS Out backplane pins. Normally, BITS Out is used with line nodes, so the options displayed are the working optical cards. BITS-1 and BITS-2 Out are enabled as soon as BITS-1 and BITS-2 facilities are placed in service.

B.7.1.5.3  Status Subtab

The Status subtab displays timing status information.

---

Note If you change any values in the Status subtab and click Apply at the bottom of the screen, the values are not set. Instead, use the following buttons to apply changes:

•Clear—Releases any existing switch request. For example, if you issue a Force Switch and then issue a Clear, the Force Switch request is released.

•Manual Switch—Switches the timing reference from one source to another.

•Force Switch—Switches the timing reference from one source to another. This request has a higher priority than the Manual Switch request.

---

Table B-131 Field Descriptions for the Status Subtab 

Field	Description
NE Clock
NE Reference	Set the NE timing reference to internal, BITS-1, or BITS-2.
Status	Displays the status of the NE clock.
Operations	Execute a switch on the NE timing reference.
BITS-1 Out
BITS-1 Out	Set the BITS-1 out timing reference.
Status	Displays the status of the BITS-1 out timing reference.
Operations	Execute a switch on the BITS-1 out timing reference.
BITS-2 Out
BITS-2 Out	Set the BITS-2 out timing reference.
Status	Displays the status of the BITS-2 out timing reference.
Operations	Execute a switch on the BITS-2 out timing reference.

B.7.1.5.4  Timing Report Subtab

The Timing Report subtab summarizes the NE's current timing settings.

B.7.1.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab contains the following subtabs:

•Protection Groups Subtab

•Operations Subtab

B.7.1.6.1  Protection Groups Subtab

The Protection Groups subtab displays a list of available protection groups and allows you to create, delete, and view protection groups.

Table B-132 Field Descriptions for the Protection Groups Subtab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups. Click the Create or Delete button to create a new protection group or delete an existing one.
Selected Protection Group
Name	Modify the name of the selected protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Type	View the protection type (1:1 [card], 1:N [card], Y Cable [port], 1+1 [port], or 1+1 Optimized [port]) of the selected protection group.
Protect Module	View the protect module if using 1:1 or 1:N protection.
Available Entities	Displays a list of available entities. You can toggle between available and working entities.
Working Entities	Displays a list of working entities. You can toggle between working and available entities.
Bidirectional Switching	Click if you want both the transmit and the receive channels to switch if a failure occurs on one. This option is only available if you select 1+1 (port) type.
Revertive	If checked, the node reverts traffic to the working card or port after failure conditions stay corrected for the amount of time entered in Reversion Time. This option is not available if the 1:N (card) type has been selected.
Reversion Time	If Revertive is checked, choose the amount of time following failure condition correction after which the node should switch back to the working card or port. Use half-minute increments. This option is only available if you select 1:1 (card) type.
Recovery Guard Time	The recovery guard timer prevents rapid switches due to SD or SF failures. After the SD or SF condition is cleared on a facility protected by Optimized 1+1 protection, no switches are performed for the duration of the recovery guard timer.
Verification Guard Time	The verification guard timer specifies the amount of time that a user command has to complete. If a user command cannot be completed within the duration set by the verification guard timer, the command is cleared and an APS_CLEAR event is sent.
Detection Guard Time	The detection guard timer specifies the amount of time after a failure that the system has to complete a switch. After detecting a SD, SF, LOS, LOF, or AISL failure, the detection guard timer is started. If the detection guard timer is set to zero, the system completes a switch within 60 ms for failure events.

B.7.1.6.2  Operations Subtab

The Operations subtab displays protection group operation information.

Table B-133 Field Descriptions for the Operations Subtab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection groups and allows you to execute switch commands.
Switch Commands	Allows you to perform a manual switch, perform a forced switch, or clear the existing command switching.
Inhibit Switching	Allows you to inhibit unlock switching, lock out switching, or lock on switching.

B.7.1.7  Ether Bridge Tab

The Ether Bridge tab contains the following subtabs:

•Spanning Tree Config Subtab

•Spanning Tree Status Subtab

B.7.1.7.1  Spanning Tree Config Subtab

The Spanning Tree Config subtab displays spanning tree configuration information for the ONS 15454.

Table B-134 Field Descriptions for the Spanning Tree Config Subtab 

Field	Description
Index Number	Unique number that identifies the spanning tree.
Priority	Incoming traffic queue. Priority can be either high or low.
Bridge Max Age	Maximum amount of time that received-protocol information is retained before it is discarded.
Bridge Hello Time	Time interval, in seconds, between the transmission of configuration bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) by a bridge that is the spanning-tree root or is attempting to become the spanning-tree root.
Bridge Forward Delay	Time spent by a port in the listening state and the learning state.

B.7.1.7.2  Spanning Tree Status Subtab

The Spanning Tree Status subtab displays spanning tree status information for the ONS 15454.

Table B-135 Field Descriptions for the Spanning Tree Status Subtab 

Field	Description
Index Number	Unique number that identifies the spanning tree.
Bridge ID	ONS 15454 unique identifier that transmits the configuration BPDU; the bridge ID is a combination of the bridge priority and the ONS 15454 MAC address.
Topology Age	Amount of time, in seconds, since the last topology change.
Topology Changes	Number of times the spanning-tree topology has been changed since the node booted up.
Designated Root	Spanning tree's designated root for a particular spanning-tree instance.
Root Cost	Total path cost to the designated root.
Root Port	Port used to reach the root.
Max Age	Maximum amount of time that received-protocol information is retained before it is discarded.
Hello Time	Time interval, in seconds, between the transmission of configuration BPDUs by a bridge that is the spanning-tree root or is attempting to become the spanning-tree root.
Hold Time	Minimum time period, in seconds, that elapses during the transmission of configuration information on a given port.
Forward Delay	Time spent by a port in the listening state and the learning state.

B.7.1.8  NE Defaults Tab

The NE Defaults tab displays a list of default thresholds for the ONS 15454 SONET NE. You can edit NE defaults for the ONS 15454 SONET R5.0 and later.

Table B-136 Field Descriptions for the NE Defaults Tab 

Field	Description
Parameter	Lists the default NE parameter.
Value	Shows the default parameter value, and allows you to change the default.
Units	Lists the unit of measure that corresponds to the default NE parameter.
Range	Lists the possible range of values for the default NE parameter. Note This field applies to the ONS 15454 SONET R6.0 and later.
Side Effects	Lists any side effects that could occur as a result of changing the default NE parameter. Note This field applies to the ONS 15454 SONET R6.0 and later.

You can load different NE defaults using the NE Defaults Management window. See 4.5.10  Restoring NE Defaults, page 4-78.

B.7.1.9  Security Tab

The Security tab allows you to view and edit security features for the ONS 15454 NE. The security tab contains the following subtabs:

•Policy Subtab

•Password Subtab

•Access Subtab

•RADIUS Server Subtab

•Legal Disclaimer Subtab

B.7.1.9.1  Policy Subtab

The Policy subtab allows you to specify user security parameters.

---

Note If the user is already logged in, any changes to the NE user type settings become applicable only when the user next logs in.

---

Table B-137 Field Descriptions for the Policy Subtab 

Field	Description
Idle User Timeout
Each CTC or TL1 user can be idle during his or her login session for a specified amount of time before the CTC window is locked. The lockouts prevent unauthorized users from making changes. Higher-level users have shorter default idle periods and lower-level users have longer or unlimited default idle periods. The user idle period can be modified by a SuperUser. Note A user already logged into the node is not affected by a change to the Idle User Timeout policy.
Retrieve	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC Retrieve user.
Maintenance	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC Maintenance user.
Provisioner	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC Provisioner user.
SuperUser	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC SuperUser user.
User Lockout
Manual Unlock by SuperUser	If checked, the CTC SuperUser user must manually unlock locked out CTC users. If unchecked, locked out CTC users are automatically unlocked after the lockout duration period elapses.
Lockout Duration	Set the lockout duration period for locked out CTC users. This field is enabled only if the Manual Unlock by SuperUser check box is unchecked.
Failed Logins Allowed	Set the number of failed logins before the CTC user is automatically locked out.
Other
Single Sessions per User	If checked, each CTC user can launch only one session at a time.
Disable Inactive User	If checked, inactive users are disabled automatically. Specify the duration in the Inactive Duration field.
Inactive Duration	Specify the inactive duration in days. The range is from 1 to 90 days; the Cisco default is 45 days. A value of 0 implies inactive duration is disabled and invalid.

B.7.1.9.2  Password Subtab

The Password subtab allows you to specify user password security parameters.

Table B-138 Field Descriptions for the Password Subtab 

Field	Description
Password Change
Prevent Reusing Last	Prevents setting a CTC user's current password to one of the most recent passwords. You can set the number of most recent passwords that cannot be reused.
Disable Password Flipping	If checked, users are not allowed to change passwords for the number of days specified in the Cannot Change New Password For field.
Can Change Password After	Enter the number of days that must elapse before the user can change the password.
Force Password Change After Assigned	If checked, during the first successful login, the user is forced to change the password.
Password Difference	Allows SuperUsers to specify the number of characters by which the new password of a user must differ from the old password, while performing a password change. The default value is 1. The range is from 1 to 5 characters.
Password Aging
Enable Password Aging	Check this check box to enable password aging.
Aging Period	Enter the aging period, in days, for Retrieve, Maintenance, Provisioner, and SuperUser CTC users. After the aging period expires, CTC users are forced to change their passwords.
Warning Period	Enter the warning period, in days, for Retrieve, Maintenance, Provisioner, and SuperUser CTC users. After the warning period expires, CTC users are warned that their passwords will soon expire.

B.7.1.9.3  Access Subtab

The Access subtab allows you to configure LAN and shell access to the NE.

Table B-139 Field Descriptions for the Access Subtab 

Field	Description
Access
LAN Access	Specify the type of LAN access allowed. Values are Backplane Only, No LAN Access, Front and Backplane, or Front Only (for ONS 15454 SONET NEs only). Note After setting the LAN access to the backplane, the CTM client is unusable for 4 to 5 minutes.
Restore Timeout	This time period begins if No LAN Access is selected and all DCC connections are lost. If the time expires before a DCC is restored, LAN access is restored so that the node is not isolated. When the DCC comes back, LAN access returns to its specified settings. The range is from 0 (never) to 60 minutes; the Cisco default is 5 minutes.
Shell Craft Access (available for ONS 15454 SONET NEs R6.0 and later)
Enable Craft Port	Check this check box to enable the craft port.
Shell Access
Shell Access on	Specify shell access on Telnet or SSH.
SSH Port	Indicates the SSH port number that will be used if the SSH radio button is selected.
Telnet Port	This is enabled if you selected the Telnet radio button. Enter the Telnet port number.
Use Standard Telnet Port	If checked, the standard Telnet port is used for Telnet access.
Shell Access (available for ONS 15454 SONET NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the Shell access state from the pull-down menu. You can select Disable, Non-secure, or Secure.
SSH Port	Indicates the SSH port number that will be used.
Telnet Port	This is enabled if you selected the Non-secure access state. Enter the Telnet port number that will be used.
Use Standard Telnet Port	Check this check box to indicate that the standard Telnet port will be used.
EMS Access (available for ONS 15454 SONET NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the EMS access state from the pull-down menu. You can select either Non-secure or Secure.
CORBA Listener Port	Select the port numbers for the TCC CORBA (IIOP) listener port and the TCC CORBA (SSLIOP) listener port. Select one of the following radio buttons: •Default-Fixed—Assigns a default port number. •Standard Constant—Port number for the TCC CORBA (IIOP) listener port will be 683. Port number for the TCC CORBA (SSLIOP) listener port will be 684. •Other Constant—When selected, enter the port number that will be used.
TL1 Access (available for ONS 15454 SONET NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the TL1 access state from the pull-down menu. You can select Disable, Non-secure, or Secure.
SNMP Access (available for ONS 15454 SONET NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the SNMP access state from the pull-down menu. You can select either Disable or Non-secure.
Other
PM Clearing Privilege	Select the user privilege that allows clearing PM statistics for the NE.

B.7.1.9.4  RADIUS Server Subtab

The RADIUS Server subtab allows you to configure, create, modify, and delete RADIUS servers for the ONS 15454 SONET R6.0 and later.

Table B-140 Field Descriptions for the RADIUS Server Subtab 

Field	Description
Enable RADIUS Authentication	Check this check box to enable RADIUS authentication.
Enable RADIUS Accounting	Check this check box to enable RADIUS accounting. This is enabled if the Enable RADIUS Authentication check box is checked.
Enable the Node as the Final Authenticator When no RADIUS server is reachable	Select a row from the RADIUS Servers in Order of Authentication table; then, check this check box. This indicates that the RADIUS server that you selected will be the final authenticator when there are no more RADIUS servers that can be reached.
Create	Click this button to create a RADIUS server. See 8.4.2.1.1  Creating a RADIUS Server, page 8-50.
Edit	Click this button to modify an existing RADIUS server's information. See 8.4.2.1.2  Modifying a RADIUS Server, page 8-50.
Delete	Click this button to delete an existing RADIUS server. See 8.4.2.1.3  Deleting a RADIUS Server, page 8-50.
Move Up/Move Down	Select the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the list of RADIUS servers in the RADIUS Servers in Order of Authentication table.
RADIUS Servers in Order of Authentication
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the RADIUS server.
Shared Secret	Displays a text string that serves as a password between a RADIUS client and RADIUS server.
Authentication Port	Displays the authentication port number of the RADIUS server. Default access is through port number 1812.
Accounting Port	Displays the accounting port number of the RADIUS server. Default access is through port number 1813.

B.7.1.9.5  Legal Disclaimer Subtab

The Legal Disclaimer subtab allows you to edit the NE's advisory message and preview the disclaimer.

Table B-141 Field Descriptions for the Legal Disclaimer Subtab 

Subtab	Description
Advisory Message	The existing message is a default, noncustomer-specific disclaimer. If you want to edit this statement with specifics for your company, you can change the text. You can also use the following HTML commands to format the text: <b> Begins boldface font </b> Ends boldface font <center> Aligns type in the center of the window </center> Ends the center alignment <font=n, where n = point size> Changes the font to the new size </font> Ends the font size command <p> Creates a line break <sub> Begins subscript </sub> Ends subscript <sup> Begins superscript </sup> Ends superscript <u> Starts underline </u> Ends underline
Preview	Allows you to view the advisory message before saving it.

B.7.1.10  Alarm Tab

The Alarm tab allows you to change default alarm severities by creating unique alarm profiles for individual ONS 15454 nodes. The Alarm tab contains Profile and Alarm Behavior subtabs.

B.7.1.10.1  Profile Subtab

The Profile subtab allows you to view, create, or delete alarm profiles.

Table B-142 Field Descriptions for the Profile Subtab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile Name	Choose an alarm profile for the NE from the drop-down list. Click Create to create a new alarm profile for the NE. Click Delete to delete an alarm profile from the NE.
Condition	Displays the alarm condition.
Severity	Displays the alarm severity.

B.7.1.10.2  Alarm Behavior Subtab

The Alarm Behavior subtab allows you to change default alarm severities by creating unique alarm profiles.

Table B-143 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Subtab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Choose a global alarm profile for the NE from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed.
Slot Number	Displays the location of the module.
Equipment Type	Displays the type of module in the slot.
Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the slot from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	Indicates whether or not the alarms for the particular card are suppressed. If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.

B.7.1.11  XC Utilization Tab

The XC Utilization tab allows you to view a summary of the percentage of XTC cross-connect resources used by circuits that traverse or terminate at an ONS 15454 SONET.

Table B-144 Field Descriptions for the XC Utilization Tab

Field	Description
VT Payload Type	Indicates the payload type of the cross-connect card in the NE. This field is not editable unless the NE contains an XCVXC card. If the NE contains an XCVXC card, you can specify the VT payload type as VT1.5, VT2, or mixed mode (a combination of VT1.5 and VT2).
Summary
STS-1 Matrix	Provides the percentage of the XC cross-connect STS-1 paths resources that are used.
VT2 Matrix Ports	Provides the percentage of the XTC cross-connect VT2 matrix ports that are used, and the total number of ports available.
VT2 Matrix	Provides the percentage of the VT2 matrix resources that are used, and the total number of resources available.
VT1.5 Matrix Ports	Provides the percentage of the XTC cross-connect VT1.5 matrix ports that are used, and the total number of ports available.
VT1.5 Matrix	Provides the percentage of the V1.5 matrix resources that are used, and the total number of resources available.

B.7.1.12  BLSR Tab

The BLSR tab allows you to view BLSR information and create or delete BLSRs.

Table B-145 Field Descriptions for the BLSR Tab 

Field	Description
Fiber Type	Indicates whether the fiber type is 2-fiber or 4-fiber.
Rate	Select the BLSR rate.
Ring Name	Assign a six-digit alphanumeric ring name. Nodes in the same BLSR must have the same ring name.
Node ID	Assign a node ID. The node ID identifies the node to the BLSR. Nodes in the same BLSR must have unique node IDs.
Ring Reversion	Set the amount of time that will pass before the traffic reverts to the original working path. The Cisco default is 5 minutes. All nodes in a BLSR ring should have the same ring reversion setting, particularly if never (nonrevertive) is selected.
Span Reversion	Set the amount of time to pass before the span reverts to the working path.
East Line	Assign the east BLSR port.
East Switch	Displays a list of switch commands for the east port.
West Line	Assign the west BLSR port.
West Switch	Displays a list of switch commands for the west port.
East Protect	For 4-fiber BLSRs, assign the east BLSR protect port.
West Protect	For 4-fiber BLSRs, assign the west BLSR protect port.

B.7.1.13  DWDM Tab

The DWDM tab allows you to manage and provision DWDM connections. The DWDM tab contains the following subtabs:

•Provisioning Subtab

•Connections Subtab

•Port Status Subtab

•Span Check Subtab

•APC Subtab

•ROADM Power Monitoring Subtab

B.7.1.13.1  Provisioning Subtab

The Provisioning subtab allows you to view, export, and import a Cisco MetroPlanner configuration file into the DWDM node to configure the node automatically. Use the Export and Import buttons to export or import the file.

Table B-146 Field Descriptions for the Provisioning Subtab

Field	Description
Attribute Name	Displays the property name that is imported from or exported to the Cisco MetroPlanner configuration file.
Value	Displays the default value of the corresponding property name imported from or exported to the Cisco MetroPlanner configuration file.

B.7.1.13.2  Connections Subtab

The Connections subtab allows you to create, delete, or calculate DWDM connections.

Table B-147 Field Descriptions for the Connections Subtab

Field	Description
Slot-From	The slot from which the DWDM connection originates.
Unit-From	The unit from which the DWDM connection originates.
Port-From	The port from which the DWDM connection originates.
Slot-To	The slot to which the DWDM connection terminates.
Unit-To	The unit to which the DWDM connection terminates.
Port-To	The port to which the DWDM connection terminates.
State	The state of the DWDM connection.

B.7.1.13.3  Port Status Subtab

The Port Status subtab allows you to view port status and launch automatic node setup (ANS) for the selected port.

Table B-148 Field Descriptions for the Port Status Subtab 

Field	Description
Launch ANS button	Launches the ANS function for the selected port. ANS adjusts the VOAs on the different channel paths to equalize the amplifier per-channel input power.
Slot ID	Lists the ONS node slot where the DWDM card is installed.
Card	Describes the card that is installed in the slot.
Port	Displays the card port.
Link Status	Displays the status of the link. Possible values are: •Success - Changed—The calculated setpoint was changed. •Success - Unchanged—The calculated setpoint was not changed. •Fail - Out of Range—The calculated setpoint is outside the range for that parameter. •Fail - Port in IS State—The setpoint cannot be applied because the port has an IS-NR service state. •Not Applicable—The setpoint does not apply to the node.
Parameter	The parameter name.

B.7.1.13.4  Span Check Subtab

The Span Check subtab allows you to check the span loss between the selected node and the previous node in the chain. The span check is always in reception.

---

Note If the Measured Span Loss value crosses the Min or Max Expected Span Loss threshold, a condition is raised.

---

Table B-149 Field Descriptions for the Span Check Subtab 

Field	Description
Retrieve Span Loss Values button	Runs the span loss verification function and retrieves values for the measure span loss column.
Side	Specifies the side for which span loss information is displayed (east-to-west or west-to-east).
Min Exp. Span Loss	Specifies the minimum expected span loss (in dBm) for the incoming span. This value is imported from MetroPlanner, but can be modified manually.
Max Exp. Span Loss	Specifies the maximum expected span loss (in dBm) for the incoming span.
Meas. Span Loss	The measured span loss value.
Resolution	The resolution or accuracy of the span loss measurement.

B.7.1.13.5  APC Subtab

The APC subtab allows you to manually run the automatic power control function, disable and enable APC, and view the date and time the power control setpoint was last checked and modified.

Table B-150 Field Descriptions for the APC Subtab 

Field	Description
Disable APC button	Disables the automatic power control function. Caution Disabling APC should be performed only for specific maintenance actions. When APC is disabled, aging compensation calculations are not performed and circuits cannot be activated.
Run APC button	Runs the automatic power control function manually.
Slot ID	The slot number for power control information and actions.
Card	The card type that is installed in the slot.
Port	The port number.
Last Modification	Date and time the power control setpoint was last modified.
Last Check	Date and time the power control setpoint was last verified.

B.7.1.13.6  ROADM Power Monitoring Subtab

The ROADM Power Monitoring subtab provides a graphical representation of the power of each channel for each ROADM node. Specifically, it provides the power of the pass-through wavelength, the power of the added wavelength, and the equalized power out of the wavelength.

B.7.1.14  OSI Tab

The OSI tab allows you to provision ONS 15454 SONET Open System Interconnection (OSI) parameters. It contains the following subtabs:

•Main Setup Subtab

•TARP-Config Subtab

•TARP-TDC Subtab

•TARP-MAT Subtab

•Routers-Setup Subtab

•Subnets Subtab

•Tunnels Subtab

•IS-IS RIB Subtab

•ES-IS RIB Subtab

B.7.1.14.1  Main Setup Subtab

The Main Setup subtab allows you to view and provision the OSI Network Entity Title (NET) address and the OSI routing mode.

Table B-151 Field Descriptions for the Main Setup Subtab 

Field	Description
Main Network Entity Title	Displays the node NET. The NET is used in OSI networks to identify the node to the end system (ES) or intermediate system (IS).
End System	Provisions the node as an OSI End System (ES). ESs send End System Hello (ESH) messages regularly to announce their presence to neighboring ISs and ESs.
Intermediate System Level 1	Provisions the node as an OSI Intermediate System (IS). The ONS 15454 SONET performs all IS functions including routing data between ISs and ESs, between networks, and between parts of a network. ISs send Intermediate System Hello (ISH) messages regularly to announce their presence to neighboring ISs and ESs. For the ONS 15454 SONET, Intermediate System Level 1 is the Cisco default.
Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2	The ONS 15454 SONET performs all IS functions. It communicates with other IS and ES nodes within an OSI area and broadcasts ISHs to IS nodes in other areas to which it is connected.
Node Routing Mode
L1 LSP Buffer Size	Sets the Level 1 Link State Protocol (LSP) data unit buffer size. The Cisco default 512.
L2 LSP Buffer Size	Sets the Level 2 Link State Protocol (LSP) data unit buffer size. The Cisco default 512.

B.7.1.14.2  TARP-Config Subtab

The TARP Config subtab allows you to provision the TID Address Resolution protocol (TARP). TARP is used when TL1 TIDs must be translated to an NSAP address. During the TID-to-NSAP translation, the TID is mapped to a NET; then, the NSAP is derived from the NET based on the NSAP selector value.

Table B-152 Field Descriptions for the TARP-Config Subtab 

Field	Description
TARP PDUs L1 Propagation	If checked (default), TARP Type 1 PDUs received by the node that are not excluded by the loop detection buffer are propagated to other NEs within the OSI Level 1 area. Type 1 PDUs request a protocol address that matches a target TID within a Level1 routing area. The propagation does not occur if the NE is the target of the Type 1 PDU and the PDUs are not propagated to the NE from which the PDU was received. Note This parameter is not used when the node is set to End System.
TARP PDUs L2 Propagation	If checked (default), TARP Type 2 PDUs received by the node that are not excluded by the loop detection buffer are propagated to other NEs within the OSI Level 2 area. Type 2 PDUs request a protocol address that matches a target TID within a Level 2 routing area. The propagation occurs if the NE is the not the target of the Type 2 PDU and the PDUs are not propagated to the NE from which the PDU was received.
TARP PDUs Origination	If checked (default), the node performs all TARP configuration functions, including: •TID-to-NSAP resolution requests •NSAP-to-TID requests •TARP address changes Note TARP Echo and NSAP to TID are not supported.
L1 TARP Data Cache	If checked, the node maintains a TARP data cache (TDC). The TDC is a database of TID to NSAP pairs created from TARP Type 3 PDUs received by the node. TARP 3 PDUs are responses to Type 1 and Type 2 PDUs and modified by TARP Type 4 PDUs (TID to NSAP updates or corrections).
L2 TARP Data Cache	If checked (default), the TIDs and NSAPs are added to the TDC before the node propagates the requests to other NEs. Note This parameter is designed for IS Level 1/Level 2 nodes that are connected to other IS Level 1/Level 2 nodes. Enabling the parameter for IS Level 1 nodes is not recommended.
LDB	If checked, enables the TARP loop detection buffer (LDB). The LDB prevents TARP PDUs from being sent more than once on the same subnet.
LAN TARP Storm Suppression	If checked (default), enables the TARP storm suppression to prevent redundant TARP PDUs from being propagated across the network.
Send Type 4 PDU on Startup	If checked, a TARP Type 4 PDU is originated during the initial ONS 15454 SONET startup. Type 4 PDUs indicate a TID or NSAP change has occurred at the NE. This is disabled by default.
Type 4 PDU Delay	Sets the amount of time that will pass before the Type 4 PDU is generated. The Cisco default value is 60 seconds. The range is from 0 to 255 seconds.
Timers
LDB Entry	Sets the TARP loop detection buffer (LDB) timer. The LDB buffer time is assigned to each LDB entry for which the TARP sequence number is zero. The Cisco default is 5 minutes. The range is from 1 to 10 minutes.
LDB Flush	Sets the frequency period for flushing the LDB. The Cisco default is 5 minutes. The range is from 0 to 1440 minutes.
T1 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for response to a Type 1 Request PDU. Type 1 requests seek a specific NE TID within an OSI Level 1 area. The Cisco default is 15 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.
T2 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for a Type 2 Request PDU. TARP Type 2 requests seek a specific NE TID within an OSI Level 1 area. The Cisco default is 25 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.
T3 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for an address resolution request. The Cisco default is 40 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.
T4 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for an error recovery. The timer begins after the T2 timer expires without successfully finding the NE TID. The Cisco default is 20 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.

B.7.1.14.3  TARP-TDC Subtab

Table B-153 Field Descriptions for the TARP-TDC Subtab 

Field	Description
TID	Target ID that is statistically linked to an NSAP or NET. For ONS nodes, the TID is the node name.
NSAP/NET	The NSAP that is statistically linked to the TID.
Type	Indicates how the TARP data cache entry was created. It can be either: •Dynamic—The entry was created through the TARP propagation process. •Static—The entry was manually created and is a static entry.
Add Static Entry button	Click this button to statically link a TID to an NSAP or NET.
Delete Selected Entry button	Click this button to delete the selected TID to NSAP/NET static entry.
TID to NSAP	Click this button to query the network for an NSAP that matches a TID.
Flush Dynamic Entries	Click this button to delete all dynamically generated TDC entries.

B.7.1.14.4  TARP-MAT Subtab

The TARP-MAT subtab allows you to manually provision a TARP adjacency.

Table B-154 Field Descriptions for the TARP-MAT Subtab 

Field	Description
Level	Sets the TARP Type Code that will be sent. •Level 1—Indicates that the manual area adjacency is within the same area as the node. The entry generates Type 1 PDUs. •Level 2—Indicates that the manual area adjacency is in an area different from the node. The entry generates Type 2 PDUs.
NSAP	The NSAP address of the node at the other end of the TARP manual adjacency.
Add	Click this button to create a TARP manual area adjacency.
Remove	Deletes the selected TID to NSAP/NET static entry.

B.7.1.14.5  Routers-Setup Subtab

The Routers-Setup subtab allows you to view and manage OSI virtual routers.

Table B-155 Field Descriptions for the Routers-Setup Subtab 

Field	Description
Router Number	Displays the virtual router number. The ONS 15454 SONET provides three virtual routers numbered 1 through 3.
System ID	Displays the NSAP system ID of the virtual router. The NSAP system identifier is set to the node's first IEEE 802.3 MAC address + n, where n = 0 through 2. For the primary router (Router 1), n = 0.
Status	Indicates the virtual router status. Select Enabled or Disabled from the drop-down menu. Note Router 1 must be enabled before additional routers can be enabled.
Primary Area Address	Indicates the primary manual area address. For Router 1, this is the main NET for the node; that is, the NSAP without the system ID and selector (set to 00) fields.
Manual Area Address 1	Indicates the address of any additional manual areas that are created. Note An OSI area allows up to two additional manual areas in addition to the primary manual area.
Manual Area Address 2	Indicates the address of any additional manual areas that are created. Note An OSI area allows up to two additional manual areas in addition to the primary manual area.

B.7.1.14.6  Subnets Subtab

The Subnets subtab allows you to view and manage OSI subnetwork point-of-attachment parameters. The parameters are initially provisioned when you enable a subnet on an SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, or LAN interface.

Table B-156 Field Descriptions for the Subnets Subtab 

Field	Description
Slot/Port	The subnet slot and port.
Router Number	The OSI virtual router where the subnet (SDCC, LDCC, GCC, or OSC) is provisioned.
Type	The interface where the subnet is provisioned: SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, or LAN.
Protocol	The data link protocol that is provisioned for the subnet. It can be: •Point to Point Protocol (PPP) •Link Access Protocol on the D channel (LAP-D) •802.3 for LAN subnets
ISH	The Intermediate System Hello (ISH) PDU propagation frequency. Intermediate system NEs send ISHs to other ESs and ISs to inform them about the NETs they serve. The Cisco default is 10 seconds. The range is from 10 to 1000 seconds.
ESH	The End System Hello (ESH) PDU propagation frequency. End system NEs transmit ESHs to inform other ESs and ISs about the NSAPs they serve. The Cisco default is 10 seconds. The range is from 10 to 1000 seconds.
IIH	The Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System Hello (IIH) PDU propagation frequency. The IS-IS Hello PDUs establish and maintain adjacencies between ISs. The Cisco default is 3 seconds. The range is from 1 to 600 seconds.
DisPriority	The designated intermediate system (DIS) priority. In IS-IS networks, one router is elected as the DIS. For Cisco routers, the DIS priority is 64. For the ONS 15454 LAN subnet, the default DIS priority is 63. This priority should not be changed.
IS-IS Cost	The cost for sending packets on the subnet. This is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. The Cisco default value is 20.
Enable LAN Subnet button	(Router 1 only). Enables OSI over the LAN; that is, it activates the IS-IS protocol on the LAN so OSI traffic is enabled on the LAN.
Edit button	Click Edit to modify subnet parameters.
Disable LAN Subnet	(Router 1 only). Disables OSI over the LAN if it has been enabled.

B.7.1.14.7  Tunnels Subtab

The Tunnels subtab allows you to view, create, edit, and delete Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) and Cisco tunnels. GRE tunnels encapsulate one network protocol for transfer across another network layer. Within a mixed TCP/IP and OSI network, GRE tunnels tunnel IP traffic over an OSI NE and OSI traffic over an IP NE.

Table B-157 Field Descriptions for the Tunnels Subtab 

Field	Description
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the GRE destination CTM or CTC computer.
NetMask Address	Displays the IP address subnet mask of the destination CTM or CTC computer.
NSAP Address	The destination NE NSAP address. The NSAP selector (last two NSAP characters) must be 2f (GRE tunnel) or cc (proprietary Cisco tunnel), depending on which tunnel type you want to create. The Cisco proprietary tunnel is slightly more efficient than the GRE tunnel because it does not add an encapsulation header for each IP packet, while the GRE tunnel adds a small header to the packets. The two tunnel types are incompatible. Note Most Cisco routers support the Cisco tunnel, while only a few support both GRE and Cisco IP tunnels.
OSPF Metric	Displays the cost for sending packets across the GRE tunnel. Cost is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path.
Create	Click Create to create a new GRE tunnel route.
Edit	Click Edit to edit an existing GRE tunnel.
Delete	Click Delete to delete an existing GRE tunnel.

B.7.1.14.8  IS-IS RIB Subtab

The IS-IS RIB subtab allows you to view the Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System protocol routing information base. IS-IS is an OSI link-state hierarchical routing protocol that floods the network with link-state information that enables the NEs to build a complete and consistent picture of a network topology.

Table B-158 Field Descriptions for the IS-IS RIB Subtab 

Field	Description
Router Number	Displays the OSI router number. The ONS 15454 SONET provides three virtual routers numbered 1 through 3.
Subnet Type	Indicates the OSI subnetwork point-of-attachment type used to access the destination address. It includes SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, and LAN.
Destination Address	Displays the Network Service Access Point (NSAP).
MAC Address	Displays the NE's Media Access Control (MAC) address for destinations that are accessed by the LAN subnets.

B.7.1.14.9  ES-IS RIB Subtab

The ES-IS RIB subtab allows you to view the End System to Intermediate System (ES-IS) protocol routing information base (RIB). ES-IS is an OSI protocol that defines how end systems (hosts) and intermediate systems (routers) learn about each other.

Table B-159 Field Descriptions for the ES-IS RIB Subtab 

Field	Description
Router Number	Displays the OSI router number. The ONS 15454 SONET provides three virtual routers numbered 1 through 3.
Subnet Type	Indicates the OSI subnetwork point-of-attachment type used to access the destination address. It includes SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, and LAN.
Destination Address	Displays the Network Service Access Point (NSAP) of the destination ES.
MAC Address	Displays the NE's Media Access Control (MAC) address for destinations that are accessed by the LAN subnets.

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.8  ONS 15454 SDH NE Explorer

When you choose Configuration > NE Explorer for the ONS 15454 SDH, the window displayed by CTM consists of a tree on the left side and a properties pane on the right. (See Figure B-13.) The tree provides a hierarchical view and alarm status of the NE's physical shelves and slots. The properties pane shows information about the selected entity (NE or slot). See Node Properties Pane—ONS 15454 SDH for more information.

Figure B-13 NE Explorer—ONS 15454 SDH

---

Note If CTC is launched from the web browser for an ONS 15454 SDH node, the CTC GUI might look different from when it is launched from CTM. This discrepancy occurs because the latest version of CTC (for NE releases supported by CTM) is packaged with CTM. If launched from a browser, the CTC software is retrieved from the NE itself, which might be a version different from that packaged with CTM.

---

When an NE Explorer is in autorefresh mode, all values of an entity that is being edited by the user are automatically refreshed. You will lose all of your changes unless you click the Apply button. To enable autorefresh, click the Refresh Data button in the NE Explorer.

B.8.1  Node Properties Pane—ONS 15454 SDH

The node properties pane for the ONS 15454 SDH displays information about the ONS 15454 SDH NE. The ONS 15454 SDH properties pane contains the following tabs, some of which apply only to a specific NE version:

•Shelf View Tab

•Identification Tab

•Network Tab

•DCC/GCC/OSC Tab

•Timing Tab

•Protection Tab

•Ether Bridge Tab

•NE Defaults Tab

•Security Tab

•Alarm Tab

•XC Utilization Tab

•MS-SPRing Tab

•DWDM Tab

•OSI Tab

---

Note When the NE Explorer is in autorefresh mode, any updates made to an entity or object (port, line, card, protection group, DCC, MS-SPRing, and so on) will refresh all the values of that entity even if you are currently editing the values. You will lose your changes on that entity.

---

B.8.1.1  Shelf View Tab

The Shelf View tab displays a graphic of the ONS 15454 SDH that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Moving the mouse pointer over the NE, its shelves, its slots, or its cards displays the current alarms for the shelf, slot, or card. Double-clicking a slot or card displays the slot or card in the properties pane. The right-click menu allows you to reset, delete, or change the card. For unprovisioned slots, the right-click menu allows you to add a card.

B.8.1.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays identification information about the ONS 15454 SDH NE.

Table B-160 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the ID of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
Description	Displays the description of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
NE Model	Displays the NE model type.
Software Version	Displays the current running version of the system software.
Contact	Displays the name of the node contact person and the phone number.
System Description	Displays a description of the NE.
SNTP Settings
Use NTP/SNTP Server	If checked, CTC uses an SNTP server to set the date and time of the node. Using an SNTP server ensures that all ONS 15454 SDH network nodes use the same date and time reference. The server synchronizes the node's time after power outages or software upgrades. If you check the Use NTP/SNTP Server check box, enter the server's IP address in the next field. If you do not use an SNTP server, complete the Time and Time Zone fields. The ONS 15454 SDH will use these fields for alarm dates and times.
SNTP Server	Displays the SNTP server IP address.
Location
Latitude	Allows you to set the latitude of the NE. Select North or South from the drop-down list; then, enter the degrees and minutes (or click the up and down arrows to increase or decrease each by 1 unit).
Longitude	Allows you to set the longitude of the NE. Select East or West from the drop-down list; then, enter the degrees and minutes (or click the up and down arrows to increase or decrease each by 1 unit).
Date and Time
Time	Displays the NE date and time.
Time Zone	Displays the time zone where the NE is located.
Use Daylight Savings Time	If checked, Daylight Savings Time is observed.
APC Group Name
APC State	Allows you to view the automatic power control state.
Voltage Thresholds
ELWBATVG	Allows you to set the monitor value for extreme low battery voltage (ELWBATVG) in volts direct current (VDC).
EHIBATVG	Allows you to set the monitor value for extreme high battery voltage (EHIBATVG) in VDC.
Current Voltage Environment	Shows the current voltage environment (60 volts for SDH).

B.8.1.3  Network Tab

The Network tab displays information about the NE network address. The Network tab contains the following subtabs:

•Address Subtab

•Static Routes Tab

•OSPF Subtab

•OSPF Area Range Subtab

•OSPF Virtual Links

•SNMP Subtab

•Firewall/Proxy Subtab

•Routing Table Subtab

•RIP Routing Table Subtab

•RIP Subtab

•Proxy Tunnels Subtab

•Firewall Tunnels Subtab

•Secure Config Mode Subtab

B.8.1.3.1  Address Subtab

The Address subtab allows you to view and change information about the NE network address.

Table B-161 Field Descriptions for the Address Subtab 

Field	Description
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the NE.
Default Router	Displays the IP address of the default router.
Subnet Mask	Displays the subnetwork mask ID of the NE.
MAC Address	Displays the ONS 15454 SDH address as it is identified on the IEEE 802 MAC layer.
LCD IP Setting	Allows you to configure the LCD screen. Select Allow Configuration to enable shelf address changing from the LCD. Select Display Only to prevent users from changing the shelf IP address from the LCD screen. Select Suppress Display to make the LCD screen blank.
Forward DHCP Requests	If checked, forwards DHCP requests to the IP address entered in the DHCP Server field. When the Forward DHCP Requests check box is unchecked, the field is read-only.
DHCP Server	Displays the IP address of the DHCP server.

B.8.1.3.2  Static Routes Tab

The Static Routes tab allows you to view information about CTM and ONS 15454 SDH connectivity and create or delete static routes.

Table B-162 Field Descriptions for the Static Routes Tab 

Field	Description
Destination	Displays the IP address of the computer running CTM.
Subnet Mask	Displays the subnetwork mask.
Next Hop	Displays the IP address of the router port or the node IP address if the CTM computer is connected to the node directly.
Cost	Displays the number of hops between the ONS 15454 and the computer.

B.8.1.3.3  OSPF Subtab

The OSPF subtab displays OSPF information. OSPF is a link state Internet routing protocol.

Table B-163 Field Descriptions for the OSPF Subtab 

Field	Description
Slot	Displays the slot number.
Port	Displays the port number.
DCC OSPF Area ID	Displays the number that identifies the ONS 15454 SDH NE as a unique OSPF area. The OSPF area number can be an integer from 0 to 4294967295, and it can take a form similar to an IP address. The number must be unique to the LAN OSPF area.
SDCC Metric	Sets a cost for sending packets across the Section Data Communications Channel (SDCC), which is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. This value should always be higher than the LAN metric. This value is normally unchanged.
LDCC Metric	Sets a cost for sending packets across the Line Data Communications Channel (LDCC), which is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. This value should always be higher than the LAN metric. This value is normally unchanged.
OSPF Active on LAN	If checked, enables ONS 15454 SDH OSPF topology to be advertised to OSPF routers on the LAN. Enable this field on ONS 15454 SDH NEs that directly connect to OSPF routers.
LAN Port Area ID	Displays the OSPF area ID for the router port where the ONS 15454 SDH is connected. (This number is different from the DCC OSPF area ID.)
Router Priority	Displays the value used for this NE in designated router election. The Cisco default value is zero (0). A router that has Router Priority set to 0 is ineligible to become a designated router on the attached network.
Dead Interval	Displays the number of seconds that will pass while an OSPF router's packets are not visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the Cisco default.
Retransmit Interval	Displays the time that will elapse before a packet is resent. Five seconds is the Cisco default.
Hello Interval	Displays the number of seconds between OSPF hello packet advertisements sent by OSPF routers. Ten seconds is the Cisco default.
Transit Delay	Displays the service speed. One second is the Cisco default.
LAN Metric	Displays a cost for sending packets across the LAN. This value should always be lower than the DCC metric. Ten is the Cisco default.
Authentication Type	Displays Simple Password if the router where the ONS 15454 SDH is connected uses authentication. Otherwise, it displays No Authentication.
Authentication Key	Displays the OSPF key (password) if authentication is enabled.
Confirm Authentication Key	Retype the authentication key to confirm it.

B.8.1.3.4  OSPF Area Range Subtab

The OSPF Area Range subtab allows you to view information about OSPF area ranges and create or delete area ranges.

Table B-164 Field Descriptions for the OSPF Area Range Subtab 

Field	Description
Range Address	Displays the area IP address for the ONS 15454 SDH NEs that reside within the OSPF area. For example, if the ONS 15454 SDH OSPF area includes nodes with IP addresses 10.10.20.100, 10.10.30.150, 10.10.40.200, and 10.10.50.250, the range address would be 10.10.0.0.
Range Area ID	Displays the OSPF area ID for the ONS 15454 SDH NEs. This is either the ID in the DCC OSPF Area ID field or the ID in the Area ID for LAN Port field.
Mask Length	Displays the subnet mask length.
Mask	Displays the subnet mask IP address.
Advertise	Indicates whether the OSPF routing table is advertised.

B.8.1.3.5  OSPF Virtual Links

The OSPF Virtual Links tab allows you to view information about OSPF virtual links and create or delete virtual links.

---

Note You cannot create a new virtual link unless OSPF is active on the LAN.

---

Table B-165 Field Descriptions for the OSPF Virtual Links 

Field	Description
Neighbor	Displays the router ID of the Area 0 router.
Transit Delay	Displays the service speed. One second is the Cisco default.
Retransmit Interval	Displays the time that will elapse before a packet is resent. Five seconds is the Cisco default.
Hello Interval	Displays the number of seconds between OSPF hello packet advertisements sent by OSPF routers. Ten seconds is the Cisco default.
Dead Interval	Displays the number of seconds that will pass while the packets of an OSPF router are not visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the Cisco default.
Authentication Type	Displays the authentication type.
Authentication Key	Displays the authentication key.

B.8.1.3.6  SNMP Subtab

The SNMP subtab allows you to view SNMP information and create or delete SNMP trap destinations.

Table B-166 Field Descriptions for the SNMP Subtab 

Field	Description
Allow SNMP Set	If checked, allows you to use SNMP management software with the ONS 15454 SDH.
Allow SNMP Proxy	If checked, allows you to configure the ONS 15454 SDH to proxy SNMP calls.
IP Address	The IP address of the NMS.
Community Name	The SNMP community name. Note The SNMP community string cannot be blank in CTM. If a blank community string is required in CTC builds earlier than R4.6, you must set the blank community string in CTC.
UDP Port	The UDP port for SNMP. The Cisco default UDP port is 162.
Trap Version	The trap version, either SNMP version 1 or version 2. See your NMS documentation to determine whether to use SNMP version 1 or version 2.
Relay A IP Address	The first ONS 15454 SDH to relay traps through. The IP address is appended to the base community string to tell the first NE that is relaying the trap the IP address and port to forward the trap to. The second NE recognizes the IP address and strips it from the community string before forwarding the trap.
Relay A Community Name	The community name for the relay A node to use in the trap when forwarding it.
Relay B IP Address	The second ONS 15454 SDH to relay traps through.
Relay B Community Name	The community name for the relay B node to use in the trap when forwarding it.
Relay C IP Address	The third ONS 15454 SDH to relay traps through.
Relay C Community Name	The community name for the relay C node to use in the trap when forwarding it.

B.8.1.3.7  Firewall/Proxy Subtab

The Firewall/Proxy subtab allows you to use an NE as a proxy server and/or as a firewall.

Table B-167 Field Descriptions for the Firewall/Proxy Subtab 

Field	Description
Craft Access Only	If checked, only allows CTC to access the firewall and proxy settings of the NE. Check this item only if the LAN port is used for direct workstation-to-NE connections, and not connected to a LAN. Disabling craft-only access allows the installation of a route to the LAN. Disable this only if the LAN port is actually connected to the LAN. Note This field applies only to ONS 15454 SDH releases earlier than R4.6.
Enable Firewall	If checked, blocks packets routed between the local area and DCC networks. This causes a loss of connectivity to DCC-only connected NEs. CTM cannot reestablish the connection unless the proxy is enabled. Additionally, all NEs connected to the LAN must also have their firewall enabled, or connectivity problems will result. Note This field applies only to ONS 15454 SDH releases earlier than R4.6.
Gateway Settings
Enable Proxy Server on Port	If checked, the ONS 15454 SDH serves as a proxy for connections between the CTM server and ONS 15454 SDHs that are DCC-connected to the proxy ONS 15454 SDH. The CTM server establishes connections to DCC-connected nodes through the proxy node. The CTM server can connect to nodes that it cannot directly reach from the host on which it runs. The proxy server uses port number 1080. If checked, the following radio buttons are enabled: •External Network Element (ENE)—Configures the ONS 15454 SDH to proxy as an ENE, meaning the NE supports craft access only, supports firewall, and acts as a proxy. •Gateway Network Element (GNE)—Configures the ONS 15454 SDH to proxy as a GNE, meaning the NE supports firewall and acts as a proxy. •Proxy-only—Configures the ONS 15454 SDH to act as a proxy. If unchecked, the node does not proxy; instead, it acts as a LAN-connected NE (LNE).

B.8.1.3.8  Routing Table Subtab

The Routing Table subtab allows you to view the OSPF routing table.

Table B-168 Field Descriptions for the Routing Table Subtab 

Field	Description
Destination	Displays the IP address of the destination network or host.
Mask	Displays the subnet mask used to reach the destination host or network.
Gateway	Displays the IP address of the gateway used to reach the destination network or host.
Usage	Shows the number of times the listed route has been used.
Interface	Shows the ONS 15454 SDH interface used to access the destination. Values are: •cpm0—The ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet interface (that is, the RJ-45 jack on the TCC+/TCC2 and the LAN 1 pins on the backplane) •pdcc0—An SDCC interface (that is, an OC-N trunk card identified as the SDCC termination) •lo0—A loopback interface

B.8.1.3.9  RIP Routing Table Subtab

The RIP Routing Table subtab allows you to view the RIP routing table.

Table B-169 Field Descriptions for the RIP Routing Table Subtab 

Field	Description
Destination	Displays the IP address of the destination network or host.
Mask	Displays the subnet mask used to reach the destination host or network.
Gateway	Displays the IP address of the gateway used to reach the destination network or host.
Cost	Displays the hop count metric. The valid range is from 1 to 15.

B.8.1.3.10  RIP Subtab

The RIP subtab allows you to view and configure the RIP parameters.

---

Note When you enable RIP, you must wait for approximately one minute for the default RIP address summary to become visible.

---

---

Note When you disable RIP on the NE, all summary address entries in the Summary Address table will be deleted.

---

Table B-170 Field Descriptions for the RIP Subtab 

Field	Description
RIP Active	Enable or disable RIP.
RIP Type	Select RIP version 1.0 or RIP version 2.0.
Metric	Select the hop count metric. The valid range is from 1 to 15.
Authentication Type	Select the authentication type.
Authentication Key	Enter the authentication key (password) if the authentication type is Simple Password.
Confirm Authentication Key	Retype the authentication key to confirm it.
RIP Address Summary	•Summary Address—Displays the summary address. •Mask Length—Displays the subnet mask length. •Cost—Displays the hop count metric. The valid range is from 1 to 15.

B.8.1.3.11  Proxy Tunnels Subtab

The Proxy Tunnels subtab allows you to configure source and destination information for proxy tunnels.

Table B-171 Field Descriptions for the Proxy Tunnels Subtab 

Field	Description
Source Address	Specify the source IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.
Source Mask	Specify the source subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.
Destination Address	Specify the destination IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.
Destination Mask	Specify the destination subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.

B.8.1.3.12  Firewall Tunnels Subtab

The Firewall Tunnels subtab allows you to configure source and destination information for firewall tunnels.

Table B-172 Field Descriptions for the Firewall Tunnels Subtab 

Field	Description
Source Address	Specify the source IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.
Source Mask	Specify the source subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.
Destination Address	Specify the destination IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.
Destination Mask	Specify the destination subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.

B.8.1.3.13  Secure Config Mode Subtab

The TCC2P card supports secure config mode. When the secure mode is ON, the NE has two IP addresses, one for the backplane and one for the front port. The front port IP address is used by the DCC-connected NEs. The secure config mode feature applies to the ONS 15454 SDH R5.0 and later.

---

Note When there is no TCC2P card present, the fields in Table B-173 cannot be configured.

---

The Secure Config Mode subtab allows you to configure the secure config mode. The fields shown depend on whether the NE is in secure mode. For example, the Backplane Ethernet Port values are displayed only when the NE is in secure mode.

Table B-173 Field Descriptions for the Secure Config Mode Subtab 

Field	Description
TCP/IP Mode
Normal	When this text is visible, the NE is not in secure mode. There is one IP address shared by TCC and backplane Ethernet ports, with full connectivity between ports.
Secure	When this text is visible, the NE is in secure mode. There are separate IP addresses for TCC and backplane Ethernet ports, with no connectivity between ports.
Mode not locked	When this text is visible, you can change the secure mode.
Mode permanently locked and cannot be unlocked	When this text is visible, the NE is in secure mode, and the secure mode is locked and cannot be changed.
Backplane Ethernet Port
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the NE.
Secure IP Address	Displays the backplane IP address.
Secure Subnet Mask Length	Displays the mask length of the secure IP address. Use the up or down arrows to change the mask length.
Default Router	Displays the address of the default router for this NE.
Secure MAC Address	Displays the MAC/Ethernet address for the backplane.
Secure LCD IP Setting	Displays the setting value applicable for the secure mode. Values are: •Display Only •Suppress Display •Allow Configuration
Change Mode
Change Mode button	Opens the Change Secure Mode dialog box, which allows you to change the mode of the NE from secure to unsecure, and vice versa. This button is enabled only if an active TCC2P card exists on the NE.
Lock
Lock button	When the NE is in secure mode, the Lock button locks the secure mode on the NE/TCC so that it cannot be changed.

B.8.1.4  DCC/GCC/OSC Tab

The DCC/GCC/OSC tab allows you to create, delete, and view RS-DCCs, MS-DCCs, GCCs, OSCs, and DWDM ring IDs.

Table B-174 Field Descriptions for the DCC/GCC/OSC Tab 

Field	Description
RS-DCC
RS-DCC Terminations	Displays the slot, port, and card type of an RS-DCC termination.
OSPF Disabled on Link	Check to prevent the advertisement of the OSPF routing table.
Foreign	A check mark indicates that the far-end node is a non-ONS node.
Foreign IP	Displays the foreign node IP address.
LAPD Config	If the RS-DCC is provisioned as OSI only, the following LAP-D parameters are displayed: •AITS/UITS—Indicates the LAP-D acknowledgement type, either AITS (Acknowledged Information Transfer Service) or UITS (Unacknowledged Transfer Service). •Network/User—Indicates the LAP-D frame command/response role, either Network or User. •MTU—Shows the size of the maximum transfer unit (MTU). The range is from 512 to 1500 octets. •T2000—Shows the time between SABME (Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode) frame transmission. The range is from 0.2 to 20 seconds. •T203—Shows the maximum time between LAP-D frame exchanges. The range is from 4 to 120 seconds.
OSI SNPA	If the RS-DCC is provisioned for OSI, the following subnetwork point-of-attachment (SNPA) information is displayed: •Router—Indicates the ONS router and NSAP address. •Router State—Indicates whether the router is enabled or disabled.
Service State	Select the state of the termination (Unlocked, Locked, Failed, Locked Maintenance, Unlocked Automatic In Service) plus the secondary state (MEA, UEQ, UAS, SWDL, MT, AINS, DSBLD, LPBK).
MS-DCC
MS-DCC Terminations	Displays the slot, port, and card type of an MS-DCC termination.
OSPF Disabled on Link	Check to prevent the advertisement of the OSPF routing table.
Foreign	A check mark indicates that the far-end node is a non-ONS node.
Foreign IP	Displays the foreign node IP address.
LAPD Config	Displays the LAP-D parameters for the MS-DCCs that are provisioned as OSI only.
OSI SNPA	If the MS-DCC is provisioned for OSI, the following SNPA information is displayed: •Router—Indicates the ONS router and NSAP address. •Router State—Indicates whether the router is enabled or disabled.
Service State	Select the state of the termination (Unlocked, Locked, Failed, Locked Maintenance, Unlocked Automatic In Service) plus the secondary state (MEA, UEQ, UAS, SWDL, MT, AINS, DSBLD, LPBK).
GCC
GCC Terminations	Displays the slot, port, and card type of a GCC termination.
OSPF Disabled on Link	Check to prevent the advertisement of the OSPF routing table.
GCC Rate	Displays the GCC rate.
Foreign	A check mark indicates that the far-end node is a non-ONS node.
Foreign IP	Displays the foreign node IP address.
LAPD Config	Displays the LAP-D parameters for the GCCs that are provisioned as OSI only. For GCCs, this column is always N/A.
OSI SNPA	If the GCC is provisioned for OSI, the following SNPA information is displayed: •Router—Indicates the ONS router and NSAP address. •Router State—Indicates whether the router is enabled or disabled.
Service State	Select the state of the termination (Unlocked, Locked, Failed, Locked Maintenance, Unlocked Automatic In Service) plus the secondary state (MEA, UEQ, UAS, SWDL, MT, AINS, DSBLD, LPBK).
OSC
OSC Terminations	Displays the slot, port, and card type of an OSC termination.
LAPD Config	Displays the LAP-D parameters for the OSCs that are provisioned as OSI only. For GCCs, this column is always N/A.
OSI SNPA	If the OSC is provisioned for OSI, the following SNPA information is displayed: •Router—Indicates the ONS router and NSAP address. •Router State—Indicates whether the router is enabled or disabled.
Service State	Select the state of the termination (Unlocked, Locked, Failed, Locked Maintenance, Unlocked Automatic In Service) plus the secondary state (MEA, UEQ, UAS, SWDL, MT, AINS, DSBLD, LPBK).
DWDM Ring ID
Ring ID	Displays the ring ID.
West Direction	Lists the OSCM or OSC-CSM port that supports the ring in the west direction. The value is N/A if there are no ports in the west direction.
East Direction	Lists the OSCM or OSC-CSM port that supports the ring in the east direction. The value is N/A if there are no ports in the east direction.
Create button	Allows you to create new terminations on SONET, SDH, or transponder cards.
Edit button	Allows you to modify existing terminations on SONET, SDH, or transponder cards.
Delete button	Allows you to delete the selected RS-DCC, MS-DCC, GCC, OSC, or DWDM ring ID.

B.8.1.5  Timing Tab

The Timing tab contains the following subtabs:

•General Subtab

•Reference List Subtab

•Status Subtab

•Timing Report Subtab

B.8.1.5.1  General Subtab

The General subtab displays general timing information.

Table B-175 Field Descriptions for the General Subtab 

Field	Description
General Timing
Timing Mode	Set to External if the ONS 15454 SDH derives its timing from a BITS source wired to the backplane pins; set to Line if timing is derived from an OC-N card that is optically connected to the timing node. A third option, Mixed, allows you to set external and line timing references. Caution Mixed timing might cause timing loops; it is recommended that you use this mode with care.
Revertive	If checked, the ONS 15454 SDH reverts to a primary reference source after the conditions that caused it to switch to a secondary timing reference are corrected.
Reversion Time	Specify the reversion time in half-minute increments.
BITS-IN-OUT Facility Type
In Facility Type	Provision the BITS In facility type.
Out Facility Type	Provisions the BITS Out facility type.
BITS IN Facilities
In State	Set the BITS reference to IS or OOS. For nodes set to Line timing with no equipment timed through BITS Out, set State to OOS. For nodes using External timing or Line timing with equipment timed through BITS Out, set State to IS.
Coding	Set to the coding used by your BITS reference, either AMI or HDB3.
Framing	Set to the framing used by your BITS reference.
Sync Messaging	If checked, enables the Synchronization Status Message (SSM) for BITS In. (SSM is not available if Framing is set to Super Frame.)
Admin SSM	If the Sync Messaging check box is not checked, you can choose the SSM Generation 2 type from the drop-down list.
Sa Bit	The Sa Bit field is used to transmit the SSM message. The five available Sa bits are Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7, and Sa8.
BITS OUT Facilities
Out State	Set the BITS reference to IS or OOS. For nodes set to Line timing with no equipment timed through BITS Out, set State to OOS. For nodes using External timing or Line timing with equipment timed through BITS Out, set State to IS.
Coding	Set to the coding used by your BITS reference, either AMI or HDB3.
Framing	Set to the framing used by your BITS reference.
AIS Threshold	If SSM is disabled or Super Frame is used, sets the quality level where a node sends an AIS from the BITS-1 Out and BITS-2 Out backplane pins. An AIS is raised when the optical source for the BITS reference falls to or below the SSM quality level defined in this field.
LBO	If you are timing an external device connected to the BITS Out pins, set the distance between it and the ONS 15454 SDH. Values are 0-133 ft. (Cisco default), 134-266 ft., 267-399 ft., 400-533 ft., and 534-655 ft.

B.8.1.5.2  Reference List Subtab

The Reference List subtab provides timing reference information.

Table B-176 Field Descriptions for the Reference List Subtab 

Field	Description
NE References	Allows you to define three timing references (Ref-1, Ref-2, and Ref-3). The node uses Reference 1 unless a failure occurs on that reference, in which case, the node uses Reference 2. If that fails, the node uses Reference 3, which is typically set to Internal Clock. This is the Stratum 3 clock provided on the TCC+. The options displayed depend on the Timing Mode setting. •Timing Mode set to External—Options are BITS-1, BITS-2, and Internal Clock. •Timing Mode set to Line—Options are the node's working optical cards and Internal Clock. Select the cards/ports that are directly or indirectly connected to the node wired to the BITS source, that is, the node's trunk cards. Set Reference 1 to the trunk card that is closest to the BITS source. For example, if Slot 5 is connected to the node wired to the BITS source, select Slot 5 as Reference 1. •Timing Mode set to Mixed—Both BITS and optical cards are available, allowing you to set a mixture of external BITS and optical trunk cards as timing references.
BITS-1 Out References	Allows you to define three timing references (Ref-1, Ref-2, Ref-3) for the equipment wired to the BITS Out backplane pins. Normally, BITS Out is used with line nodes, so the options displayed are the working optical cards. BITS-1 and BITS-2 Out are enabled as soon as BITS-1 and BITS-2 facilities are placed in service.
BITS-2 Out References	Allows you to define three timing references (Ref-1, Ref-2, Ref-3) for the equipment wired to the BITS Out backplane pins. Normally, BITS Out is used with line nodes, so the options displayed are the working optical cards. BITS-1 and BITS-2 Out are enabled as soon as BITS-1 and BITS-2 facilities are placed in service.

B.8.1.5.3  Status Subtab

The Status subtab displays timing status information.

---

Note If you change any values in the Status subtab and click Apply at the bottom of the screen, the values are not set. Instead, use the following buttons to apply changes:

•Clear—Releases any existing switch request. For example, if you issue a Force Switch and then issue a Clear, the Force Switch request is released.

•Manual Switch—Switches the timing reference from one source to another.

•Force Switch—Switches the timing reference from one source to another. This request has a higher priority than the Manual Switch request.

---

Table B-177 Field Descriptions for the Status Subtab 

Field	Description
NE Clock
NE Reference	Set the NE timing reference to internal, BITS-1, or BITS-2.
Status	Displays the status of the NE clock.
Operations	Execute a switch on the NE timing reference.
BITS-1 Out
BITS-1 Out	Set the BITS-1 out timing reference.
Status	Displays the status of the BITS-1 out timing reference.
Operations	Execute a switch on the BITS-1 out timing reference.
BITS-2 Out
BITS-2 Out	Set the BITS-2 out timing reference.
Status	Displays the status of the BITS-2 out timing reference.
Operations	Execute a switch on the BITS-2 out timing reference.

B.8.1.5.4  Timing Report Subtab

The Timing Report subtab summarizes the NE's current timing settings.

B.8.1.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab contains the following subtabs:

•Protection Groups Subtab

•Operations Subtab

B.8.1.6.1  Protection Groups Subtab

The Protection Groups subtab displays a list of available protection groups and allows you to create, delete, and view protection groups.

Table B-178 Field Descriptions for the Protection Groups Subtab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups
Displays a list of available protection groups. Click the Create or Delete button to create a new protection group or delete an existing one.
Selected Protection Group
Name	Modify the name of the selected protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Type	Choose the protection type (1:1, 1:N, 1+1, or Y-cable) from the drop-down list. The protection selected determines the cards that are available to serve as protect and working cards. For example, if you choose 1:N protection, only DS-1N and DS-3N cards are displayed.
Protect Module	View the protect module if using 1:1, 1:N, or Y-cable protection.
Available Entities	Displays a list of available entities. You can toggle between available and working entities.
Working Entities	Displays a list of working entities. You can toggle between working and available entities.
Bidirectional Switching	Click if you want both the transmit and the receive channels to switch if a failure occurs on one. This option is only available if you select 1+1 (port) type.
Revertive	If checked, the ONS 15454 SDH reverts traffic to the working card or port after failure conditions stay corrected for the amount of time entered in Reversion Time. This option is not available if the 1:N (card) type has been selected.
Reversion Time	If Revertive is checked, enter the amount of time following failure condition correction that should elapse before the ONS 15454 SDH switches back to the working card or port. Use half-minute increments. This option is only available if you select 1:1 (card) type.

B.8.1.6.2  Operations Subtab

The Operations subtab displays protection group operation information.

Table B-179 Field Descriptions for the Operations Subtab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection groups and allows you to execute switch commands.
Switch Commands	Allows you to perform command switching.
Inhibit Switching	Allows you to inhibit command switching.

B.8.1.7  Ether Bridge Tab

The Ether Bridge tab contains the following subtabs:

•Spanning Tree Config Subtab

•Spanning Tree Status Subtab

B.8.1.7.1  Spanning Tree Config Subtab

The Spanning Tree Config subtab displays spanning-tree configuration information for the ONS 15454 SDH.

Table B-180 Field Descriptions for the Spanning Tree Config Subtab 

Field	Description
Index Number	Unique number that identifies the spanning tree.
Priority	Incoming traffic queue. Priority can be either high or low.
Bridge Max Age	Maximum amount of time that received-protocol information is retained before it is discarded.
Bridge Hello Time	Time interval, in seconds, between the transmission of configuration bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) by a bridge that is the spanning-tree root or is attempting to become the spanning-tree root.
Bridge Forward Delay	Time spent by a port in the listening state and the learning state.

B.8.1.7.2  Spanning Tree Status Subtab

The Spanning Tree Status subtab displays spanning tree status information for the ONS 15454 SDH.

Table B-181 Field Descriptions for the Spanning Tree Status Subtab 

Field	Description
Index Number	Unique number that identifies the spanning tree.
Bridge ID	ONS 15454 SDH unique identifier that transmits the configuration BPDU; the bridge ID is a combination of the bridge priority and the ONS 15454 SDH MAC address.
Topology Age	Amount of time, in seconds, since the last topology change.
Topology Changes	Number of times the spanning-tree topology has been changed since the node booted up.
Designated Root	Spanning tree's designated root for a particular spanning-tree instance.
Root Cost	Total path cost to the designated root.
Root Port	Port used to reach the root.
Max Age	Maximum amount of time that received-protocol information is retained before it is discarded.
Hello Time	Time interval, in seconds, between the transmission of configuration BPDUs by a bridge that is the spanning-tree root or is attempting to become the spanning-tree root.
Hold Time	Minimum time period, in seconds, that elapses during the transmission of configuration information on a given port.
Forward Delay	Time spent by a port in the listening state and the learning state.

B.8.1.8  NE Defaults Tab

The NE Defaults tab displays a list of default thresholds for the ONS 15454 SDH NE. You can edit NE defaults for the ONS 15454 SDH R5.0 and later.

Table B-182 Field Descriptions for the NE Defaults Tab 

Field	Description
Parameter	Lists the default NE parameter.
Value	Shows the default parameter value, and allows you to change the default.
Units	Lists the unit of measure that corresponds to the default NE parameter.
Range	Lists the possible range of values for the default NE parameter. Note This field applies to the ONS 15454 SDH R6.0 and later.
Side Effects	Lists any side effects that could occur as a result of changing the default NE parameter. Note This field applies to the ONS 15454 SDH R6.0 and later.

You can load different NE defaults using the NE Defaults Management window. See 4.5.10  Restoring NE Defaults, page 4-78.

B.8.1.9  Security Tab

The Security tab allows you to view and edit security features for the ONS 15454 SDH NE. The security tab contains the following subtabs:

•Policy Subtab

•Password Subtab

•Access Subtab

•RADIUS Server Subtab

•Legal Disclaimer Subtab

B.8.1.9.1  Policy Subtab

The Policy subtab allows you to specify user security parameters.

---

Note If the user is already logged in, any changes to the NE user type settings become applicable only when the user next logs in.

---

Table B-183 Field Descriptions for the Policy Subtab 

Field	Description
Idle User Timeout
Each CTC or TL1 user can be idle during his or her login session for a specified amount of time before the CTC window is locked. The lockouts prevent unauthorized users from making changes. Higher-level users have shorter default idle periods and lower-level users have longer or unlimited default idle periods. The user idle period can be modified by a SuperUser. Note A user already logged into the node is not affected by a change to the Idle User Timeout policy.
Retrieve	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC Retrieve user.
Maintenance	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC Maintenance user.
Provisioner	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC Provisioner user.
SuperUser	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC SuperUser user.
User Lockout
Manual Unlock by SuperUser	If checked, the CTC SuperUser user must manually unlock locked out CTC users. If unchecked, locked out CTC users are automatically unlocked after the lockout duration period elapses.
Lockout Duration	Set the lockout duration period for locked out CTC users. This field is enabled only if the Manual Unlock by SuperUser check box is unchecked.
Failed Logins Allowed	Set the number of failed logins before the CTC user is automatically locked out.
Other
Single Sessions per User	If checked, each CTC user can only launch one session at a time.
Disable Inactive User	If checked, inactive users are disabled automatically for the amount of time in the Inactive Duration field.
Inactive Duration	Specify the inactive duration in days. The range is from 1 to 90 days; the Cisco default is 45 days. A value of 0 implies inactive duration is disabled and invalid.

B.8.1.9.2  Password Subtab

The Password subtab allows you to specify user password security parameters.

Table B-184 Field Descriptions for the Password Subtab 

Field	Description
Password Change
Prevent Reusing Last	Prevents setting a CTC user's current password to one of the most recent passwords. You can set the number of most recent passwords that cannot be reused.
Disable Password Flipping	If checked, users are not allowed to change passwords for the number of days specified in the Cannot Change New Password For field.
Can Change Password After	Enter the number of days that must elapse before the user can change the password.
Force Password Change After Assigned	If checked, during the first successful login, the user is forced to change the password.
Password Difference	Allows SuperUsers to specify the number of characters by which the new password of a user must differ from the old password, while performing a password change. The default value is 1. The range is from 1 to 5 characters.
Password Aging
Enable Password Aging	Check this check box to enable password aging.
Aging Period	Enter the aging period, in days, for Retrieve, Maintenance, Provisioner, and SuperUser CTC users. After the aging period expires, CTC users are forced to change their passwords.
Warning Period	Enter the warning period, in days, for Retrieve, Maintenance, Provisioner, and SuperUser CTC users. After the warning period expires, CTC users are warned that their passwords will soon expire.

B.8.1.9.3  Access Subtab

The Access subtab allows you to configure LAN and shell access to the NE.

Table B-185 Field Descriptions for the Access Subtab 

Field	Description
Access
LAN Access	Specify the type of LAN access allowed. Values are Backplane Only, No LAN Access, Front and Backplane, or Front Only (for ONS 15454 SONET NEs only). Note After setting the LAN access to the backplane, the CTM client is unusable for 4 to 5 minutes.
Restore Timeout	This time period begins if No LAN Access is selected and all DCC connections are lost. If the time expires before a DCC is restored, LAN access is restored so that the node is not isolated. When the DCC comes back, LAN access returns to its specified settings. The range is from 0 (never) to 60 minutes; the Cisco default is 5 minutes.
Shell Craft Access (available for ONS 15454 SDH NEs R6.0 and later)
Enable Craft Port	Check this check box to enable the craft port.
Shell Access
Shell Access on	Specify shell access on Telnet or SSH.
SSH Port	Indicates the SSH port number that will be used if the SSH radio button is selected.
Telnet Port	This is enabled if you selected the Telnet radio button. Enter the Telnet port number.
Use Standard Telnet Port	If checked, the standard Telnet port is used for Telnet access.
Shell Access (available for ONS 15454 SDH NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the Shell access state from the pull-down menu. You can select Disable, Non-secure, or Secure.
SSH Port	Indicates the SSH port number that will be used.
Telnet Port	This is enabled if you selected the Non-secure access state. Enter the Telnet port number that will be used.
Use Standard Telnet Port	Check this check box to indicate that the standard Telnet port will be used.
EMS Access (available for ONS 15454 SDH NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the EMS access state from the pull-down menu. You can select either Non-secure or Secure.
CORBA Listener Port	Select the port numbers for the TCC CORBA (IIOP) listener port and the TCC CORBA (SSLIOP) listener port. Select one of the following radio buttons: •Default-Fixed—Assigns a default port number. •Standard Constant—Port number for the TCC CORBA (IIOP) listener port will be 683. Port number for the TCC CORBA (SSLIOP) listener port will be 684. •Other Constant—When selected, enter the port number that will be used.
TL1 Access (available for ONS 15454 SDH NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the TL1 access state from the pull-down menu. You can select Disable, Non-secure, or Secure.
SNMP Access (available for ONS 15454 SDH NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the SNMP access state from the pull-down menu. You can select either Disable or Non-secure.
Other
PM Clearing Privilege	Select the users privilege that allows clearing PM statistics for the NE.

B.8.1.9.4  RADIUS Server Subtab

The RADIUS Server subtab allows you to configure, create, modify, and delete RADIUS servers for the ONS 15454 SDH R6.0 and later.

Table B-186 Field Descriptions for the RADIUS Server Subtab 

Field	Description
Enable RADIUS Authentication	Check this check box to enable RADIUS authentication.
Enable RADIUS Accounting	Check this check box to enable RADIUS accounting. This is enabled if the Enable RADIUS Authentication check box is checked.
Enable the Node as the Final Authenticator When no RADIUS server is reachable	Select a row from the RADIUS Servers in Order of Authentication table; then, check this check box. This indicates that the RADIUS server that you selected will be the final authenticator when there are no more RADIUS servers that can be reached.
Create	Click this button to create a RADIUS server. See 8.4.2.1.1  Creating a RADIUS Server, page 8-50.
Edit	Click this button to modify an existing RADIUS server's information. See 8.4.2.1.2  Modifying a RADIUS Server, page 8-50.
Delete	Click this button to delete an existing RADIUS server. See 8.4.2.1.3  Deleting a RADIUS Server, page 8-50.
Move Up/Move Down	Select the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the list of RADIUS servers in the RADIUS Servers in Order of Authentication table.
RADIUS Servers in Order of Authentication
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the RADIUS server.
Shared Secret	Displays a text string that serves as a password between a RADIUS client and RADIUS server.
Authentication Port	Displays the authentication port number of the RADIUS server. Default access is through port number 1812.
Accounting Port	Displays the accounting port number of the RADIUS server. Default access is through port number 1813.

B.8.1.9.5  Legal Disclaimer Subtab

The Legal Disclaimer subtab allows you to edit the NEs advisory message and preview the disclaimer.

Table B-187 Field Descriptions for the Legal Disclaimer Subtab 

Subtab	Description
Advisory Message	The existing message is a default, noncustomer-specific disclaimer. If you want to edit this statement with specifics for your company, you can change the text. You can also use the following HTML commands to format the text: <b> Begins boldface font </b> Ends boldface font <center> Aligns type in the center of the window </center> Ends the center alignment <font=n, where n = point size> Changes the font to the new size </font> Ends the font size command <p> Creates a line break <sub> Begins subscript </sub> Ends subscript <sup> Begins superscript </sup> Ends superscript <u> Starts underline </u> Ends underline
Preview	Allows you to view the advisory message before saving it.

B.8.1.10  Alarm Tab

The Alarm tab allows you to change default alarm severities by creating unique alarm profiles for individual ONS 15454 SDH nodes. The Alarm tab contains the following subtabs:

•Profile Subtab

•Alarm Behavior Subtab

B.8.1.10.1  Profile Subtab

The Profile subtab allows you to select, create, or delete alarm profiles.

Table B-188 Field Descriptions for the Profile Subtab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile Name	Choose an alarm profile for the NE from the drop-down list. Click Create to create a new alarm profile for the NE. Click Delete to delete an alarm profile from the NE.
Condition	Displays the alarm condition.
Severity	Displays the alarm severity.

B.8.1.10.2  Alarm Behavior Subtab

The Alarm Behavior subtab allows you to change default alarm severities by creating unique alarm profiles.

Table B-189 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Subtab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Choose a global alarm profile for the NE from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed.
Slot Number	Displays the location of the module.
Equipment Type	Displays the type of module in the slot.
Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the slot from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	Indicates whether or not the alarms for the particular card are suppressed. If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.

B.8.1.11  XC Utilization Tab

The XC Utilization tab allows you to view a summary of the percentage of XTC cross-connect resources used by circuits that traverse or terminate at an ONS 15454 SDH.

Table B-190 Field Descriptions for the XC Utilization Tab 

Field	Description
VC Payload Type	Indicates the payload type of the cross-connect card in the NE. This field is not editable unless the NE contains an XCVXC card. If the NE contains an XCVXC card, you can specify the VC payload type as VC11, VC12, or mixed mode (a combination of VC11 and VC12).
Summary
VC-4 Matrix	Provides the percentage of the XTC cross-connect VC-4 path resources that are used.
TUG3 Matrix Ports	Provides the percentage of the XTC cross-connect TUG3 matrix ports that are used.
TUG3 Matrix	Provides the percentage of the TUG3 matrix resources that are used.
VC12 Matrix Ports	Provides the percentage of the XTC cross-connect VC12 matrix ports that are used.
VC12 Matrix	Provides the percentage of the VC12 matrix resources that are used.
VC11 Matrix Ports	Provides the percentage of the XTC cross-connect VC11 matrix ports that are used.
VC11 Matrix	Provides the percentage of the VC11 matrix resources that are used.

B.8.1.12  MS-SPRing Tab

The MS-SPRing tab allows you to view MS-SPRing information and create new MS-SPRings. MS-SPRings share the ring bandwidth equally between working and protection traffic. Half of the payload bandwidth is reserved for protection in each direction, making the communication pipe half-full under normal operation. Click Create to create a new MS-SPRing; click Delete to delete an existing MS-SPRing; click Ring Map to open the Ring Map; click Squelch Table to open the Squelch table.

Table B-191 Field Descriptions for the MS-SPRing Tab 

Field	Description
Type	Indicates whether the fiber type is 2-fiber or 4-fiber.
Rate	Select the MS-SPRing rate.
Ring Name	Assign a six-digit alphanumeric ring name. Nodes in the same MS-SPRing must have the same ring name.
Node ID	Assign a node ID. The node ID identifies the node to the MS-SPRing. Nodes in the same MS-SPRing must have unique node IDs.
Ring Reversion	Set the amount of time that will pass before the traffic reverts to the original working path. The Cisco default is 5 minutes. All nodes in a MS-SPRing should have the same ring reversion setting, particularly if never (nonrevertive) is selected.
Span Reversion	Set the amount of time to pass before the span reverts to the working path.
East Line	Assign the east MS-SPRing port.
East Switch	Displays a list of switch commands for the east port.
West Line	Assign the west MS-SPRing port.
West Switch	Displays a list of switch commands for the west port.
East Protect	For 4-fiber MS-SPRings, assign the east MS-SPRing protect port.
West Protect	For 4-fiber MS-SPRings, assign the west MS-SPRing protect port.

B.8.1.13  DWDM Tab

The DWDM tab allows you to manage and provision DWDM connections. The DWDM tab contains the following subtabs:

•Provisioning Subtab

•Connections Subtab

•Port Status Subtab

•Span Check Subtab

•APC Subtab

•ROADM Power Monitoring Subtab

B.8.1.13.1  Provisioning Subtab

The Provisioning subtab allows you to view, export, and import a Cisco MetroPlanner configuration file into the DWDM node to configure the node automatically. Use the Export and Import buttons to export or import the file.

Table B-192 Field Descriptions for the Provisioning Subtab

Field	Description
Attribute Name	Displays the property name that is imported from or exported to the Cisco MetroPlanner configuration file.
Value	Displays the default value of the corresponding property name imported from or exported to the Cisco MetroPlanner configuration file.

B.8.1.13.2  Connections Subtab

The Connections subtab allows you to create, delete, or calculate DWDM connections.

Table B-193 Field Descriptions for the Connections Subtab 

Field	Description
Slot-From	The slot from which the DWDM connection originates.
Unit-From	The unit from which the DWDM connection originates.
Port-From	The port from which the DWDM connection originates.
Slot-To	The slot to which the DWDM connection terminates.
Unit-To	The unit to which the DWDM connection terminates.
Port-To	The port to which the DWDM connection terminates.
State	The state of the DWDM connection.

B.8.1.13.3  Port Status Subtab

The Port Status subtab allows you to view port status and launch ANS for the selected port.

Table B-194 Field Descriptions for the Port Status Subtab 

Field	Description
Launch ANS button	Launches the ANS function for the selected port. ANS adjusts the VOAs on the different channel paths to equalize the amplifier per-channel input power.
Slot ID	Lists the ONS node slot where the DWDM card is installed.
Card	Describes the card that is installed in the slot.
Port	Displays the card port.
Link Status	Displays the status of the link. Possible values are: •Success - Changed—The calculated setpoint was changed. •Success - Unchanged—The calculated setpoint was not changed. •Fail - Out of Range—The calculated setpoint is outside the range for that parameter. •Fail - Port in IS State—The setpoint cannot be applied because the port has an IS-NR service state. •Not Applicable—The setpoint does not apply to the node.
Parameter	The parameter name.

B.8.1.13.4  Span Check Subtab

The Span Check subtab allows you to check the span loss between the selected node and the previous node in the chain. The span check is always in reception.

---

Note If the Measured Span Loss value crosses the Min or Max Expected Span Loss threshold, a condition is raised.

---

Table B-195 Field Descriptions for the Span Check Subtab 

Field	Description
Retrieve Span Loss Values button	Runs the span loss verification function and retrieves values for the measure span loss column.
Side	Specifies the side for which span loss information is displayed (east-to-west or west-to-east).
Min Exp. Span Loss	Specifies the minimum expected span loss (in dBm) for the incoming span. This value is imported from MetroPlanner, but can be modified manually.
Max Exp. Span Loss	Specifies the maximum expected span loss (in dBm) for the incoming span.
Meas. Span Loss	The measured span loss value.
Resolution	The resolution or accuracy of the span loss measurement.

B.8.1.13.5  APC Subtab

The APC subtab allows you to manually run the automatic power control function, disable and enable APC, and view the date and time the power control setpoint was last checked and modified.

Table B-196 Field Descriptions for the APC Subtab 

Field	Description
Disable APC button	Disables the automatic power control function. Caution Disabling APC should be performed only for specific maintenance actions. When APC is disabled, aging compensation calculations are not performed and circuits cannot be activated.
Run APC button	Runs the automatic power control function manually.
Slot ID	The slot number for power control information and actions.
Card	The card type that is installed in the slot.
Port	The port number.
Last Modification	Date and time the power control setpoint was last modified.
Last Check	Date and time the power control setpoint was last verified.

B.8.1.13.6  ROADM Power Monitoring Subtab

The ROADM Power Monitoring subtab provides a graphical representation of the power of each channel for each ROADM node. Specifically, it provides the power of the pass-through wavelength, the power of the added wavelength, and the equalized power out of the wavelength.

B.8.1.14  OSI Tab

The OSI tab allows you to provision ONS 15454 SDH Open System Interconnection (OSI) parameters. It contains the following subtabs:

•Main Setup Subtab

•TARP-Config Subtab

•TARP-TDC Subtab

•TARP-MAT Subtab

•Routers-Setup Subtab

•Subnets Subtab

•Tunnels Subtab

•IS-IS RIB Subtab

•ES-IS RIB Subtab

B.8.1.14.1  Main Setup Subtab

The Main Setup subtab allows you to provision the OSI Network Entity Title (NET) address and the OSI routing mode.

Table B-197 Field Descriptions for the Main Setup Subtab 

Field	Description
Main Network Entity Title	Displays the node NET. The NET is used in OSI networks to identify the node to the end system (ES) or intermediate system (IS).
End System	Provisions the node as an OSI End System (ES). ESs send End System Hello (ESH) messages regularly to announce their presence to neighboring ISs and ESs.
Intermediate System Level 1	Provisions the node as an OSI Intermediate System (IS). ISs send Intermediate System Hello (ISH) messages regularly to announce their presence to neighboring ISs and ESs. For the ONS 15454 SDH, Intermediate System Level 1 is the Cisco default.
Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2	The ONS 15454 SDH performs all IS functions. It communicates with other IS and ES nodes within an OSI area and broadcasts ISHs to IS nodes in other areas to which it is connected.
Node Routing Mode
L1 LSP Buffer Size	Sets the Level 1 Link State Protocol (LSP) data unit buffer size. The Cisco default 512.
L2 LSP Buffer Size	Sets the Level 2 Link State Protocol (LSP) data unit buffer size. The Cisco default 512.

B.8.1.14.2  TARP-Config Subtab

The TARP Config subtab allows you to provision the TID Address Resolution protocol (TARP). TARP is used when TL1 TIDs must be translated to an NSAP address. During the TID-to-NSAP translation, the TID is mapped to a NET; then, the NSAP is derived from the NET based on the NSAP selector value.

Table B-198 Field Descriptions for the TARP-Config Subtab 

Field	Description
TARP PDUs L1 Propagation	If checked (default), TARP Type 1 PDUs received by the node that are not excluded by the loop detection buffer are propagated to other NEs within the OSI Level 1 area. Type 1 PDUs request a protocol address that matches a target TID within a Level1 routing area. The propagation does not occur if the NE is the target of the Type 1 PDU and the PDUs are not propagated to the NE from which the PDU was received. Note This parameter is not used when the node is set to End System.
TARP PDUs L2 Propagation	If checked (default), TARP Type 2 PDUs received by the node that are not excluded by the loop detection buffer are propagated to other NEs within the OSI Level 2 area. Type 2 PDUs request a protocol address that matches a target TID within a Level 2 routing area. The propagation occurs if the NE is the not the target of the Type 2 PDU and the PDUs are not propagated to the NE from which the PDU was received.
TARP PDUs Origination	If checked (default), the node performs all TARP configuration functions, including: •TID-to-NSAP resolution requests •NSAP-to-TID requests •TARP address changes Note TARP Echo and NSAP to TID are not supported.
L1 TARP Data Cache	If checked, the node maintains a TARP data cache (TDC). The TDC is a database of TID to NSAP pairs created from TARP Type 3 PDUs received by the node. TARP 3 PDUs are responses to Type 1 and Type 2 PDUs and modified by TARP Type 4 PDUs (TID to NSAP updates or corrections).
L2 TARP Data Cache	If checked (default), the TIDs and NSAPs are added to the TDC before the node propagates the requests to other NEs. Note This parameter is designed for IS Level 1/Level 2 nodes that are connected to other IS Level 1/Level 2 nodes. Enabling the parameter for IS Level 1 nodes is not recommended.
LDB	If checked, enables the TARP loop detection buffer (LDB). The LDB prevents TARP PDUs from being sent more than once on the same subnet.
LAN TARP Storm Suppression	If checked (default), enables the TARP storm suppression to prevent redundant TARP PDUs from being propagated across the network.
Send Type 4 PDU on Startup	If checked, a TARP Type 4 PDU is originated during the initial ONS 15454 SDH startup. Type 4 PDUs indicate a TID or NSAP change has occurred at the NE. This is disabled by default.
Type 4 PDU Delay	Sets the amount of time that will pass before the Type 4 PDU is generated. The Cisco default value is 60 seconds. The range is from 0 to 255 seconds.
Timers
LDB Entry	Sets the TARP loop detection buffer (LDB) timer. The LDB buffer time is assigned to each LDB entry for which the TARP sequence number is zero. The Cisco default is 5 minutes. The range is from 1 to 10 minutes.
LDB Flush	Sets the frequency period for flushing the LDB. The Cisco default is 5 minutes. The range is from 0 to 1440 minutes.
T1 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for response to a Type 1 Request PDU. Type 1 requests seek a specific NE TID within an OSI Level 1 area. The Cisco default is 15 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.
T2 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for a Type 2 Request PDU. TARP Type 2 requests seek a specific NE TID within an OSI Level 1 area. The Cisco default is 25 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.
T3 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for an address resolution request. The Cisco default is 40 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.
T4 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for an error recovery. The timer begins after the T2 timer expires without successfully finding the NE TID. The Cisco default is 20 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.

B.8.1.14.3  TARP-TDC Subtab

Table B-199 Field Descriptions for the TARP-TDC Subtab 

Field	Description
TID	Target ID that is statistically linked to an NSAP or NET. For ONS nodes, the TID is the node name.
NSAP/NET	The NSAP that is statistically linked to the TID.
Type	Indicates how the TARP data cache entry was created. It can be either: •Dynamic—The entry was created through the TARP propagation process. •Static—The entry was manually created and is a static entry.
Add Static Entry button	Click this button to statically link a TID to an NSAP or NET.
Delete Selected Entry button	Click this button to delete the selected TID to NSAP/NET static entry.
TID to NSAP	Click this button to query the network for an NSAP that matches a TID.
Flush Dynamic Entries	Click this button to delete all dynamically generated TDC entries.

B.8.1.14.4  TARP-MAT Subtab

The TARP-MAT subtab allows you to manually provision a TARP adjacency.

Table B-200 Field Descriptions for the TARP-MAT Subtab 

Field	Description
Level	Sets the TARP Type Code that will be sent. •Level 1—Indicates that the manual area adjacency is within the same area as the node. The entry generates Type 1 PDUs. •Level 2—Indicates that the manual area adjacency is in an area different from the node. The entry generates Type 2 PDUs.
NSAP	The NSAP address of the node at the other end of the TARP manual adjacency.
Add	Click this button to create a TARP manual area adjacency.
Remove	Deletes the selected TID to NSAP/NET static entry.

B.8.1.14.5  Routers-Setup Subtab

Table B-201 Field Descriptions for the Routers-Setup Subtab 

Field	Description
Router Number	Displays the virtual router number. The ONS 15454 SDH provides three virtual routers numbered 1 through 3.
System ID	Displays the NSAP system ID of the virtual router. The NSAP system identifier is set to the node's first IEEE 802.3 MAC address + n, where n = 0 through 2. For the primary router (Router 1), n = 0.
Status	Indicates the virtual router status. Select Enabled or Disabled from the drop-down menu. Note Router 1 must be enabled before additional routers can be enabled.
Primary Area Address	Indicates the primary manual area address. For Router 1, this is the main NET for the node; that is, the NSAP without the system ID and selector (set to 00) fields.
Manual Area Address 1	Indicates the address of any additional manual areas that are created. Note An OSI area allows up to two additional manual areas in addition to the primary manual area.
Manual Area Address 2	Indicates the address of any additional manual areas that are created. Note An OSI area allows up to two additional manual areas in addition to the primary manual area.

B.8.1.14.6  Subnets Subtab

The Subnets subtab allows you to view and manage OSI subnetwork point-of-attachment parameters. The parameters are initially provisioned when you enable a subnet on an SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, or LAN interface.

Table B-202 Field Descriptions for the Subnets Subtab 

Field	Description
Router Number	The OSI virtual router where the subnet (SDCC, LDCC, GCC, or OSC) is provisioned.
Slot/Port	The subnet slot and port.
Type	The interface where the subnet is provisioned: SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, or LAN.
Protocol	The data link protocol that is provisioned for the subnet. It can be: •Point to Point Protocol (PPP) •Link Access Protocol on the D channel (LAP-D) •802.3 for LAN subnets
ISH	The Intermediate System Hello (ISH) PDU propagation frequency. Intermediate system NEs send ISHs to other ESs and ISs to inform them about the NETs they serve. The Cisco default is 10 seconds. The range is from 10 to 1000 seconds.
ESH	The End System Hello (ESH) PDU propagation frequency. End system NEs transmit ESHs to inform other ESs and ISs about the NSAPs they serve. The Cisco default is 10 seconds. The range is from 10 to 1000 seconds.
IIH	The Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System Hello (IIH) PDU propagation frequency. The IS-IS Hello PDUs establish and maintain adjacencies between ISs. The Cisco default is 3 seconds. The range is from 1 to 600 seconds.
DisPriority	The designated intermediate system (DIS) priority. In IS-IS networks, one router is elected as the DIS. For Cisco routers, the DIS priority is 64. For the ONS 15454 LAN subnet, the default DIS priority is 63. This priority should not be changed.
IS-IS Cost	The cost for sending packets on the subnet. This is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. The Cisco default value is 20.
Enable LAN Subnet button	(Router 1 only). Enables OSI over the LAN; that is, it activates the IS-IS protocol on the LAN so OSI traffic is enabled on the LAN.
Edit button	Click Edit to modify subnet parameters.
Disable LAN Subnet	(Router 1 only). Disables OSI over the LAN if it has been enabled.

B.8.1.14.7  Tunnels Subtab

The Tunnels subtab allows you to view, create, edit, and delete Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) and Cisco tunnels. GRE tunnels encapsulate one network protocol for transfer across another network layer. Within a mixed TCP/IP and OSI network, GRE tunnels tunnel IP traffic over an OSI NE and OSI traffic over an IP NE.

Table B-203 Field Descriptions for the Tunnels Subtab 

Field	Description
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the GRE destination CTM or CTC computer.
NetMask Address	Displays the IP address subnet mask of the destination CTM or CTC computer.
NSAP Address	The destination NE NSAP address. The NSAP selector (last two NSAP characters) must be 2f (GRE tunnel) or cc (proprietary Cisco tunnel), depending on which tunnel type you want to create. The Cisco proprietary tunnel is slightly more efficient than the GRE tunnel because it does not add an encapsulation header for each IP packet, while the GRE tunnel adds a small header to the packets. The two tunnel types are incompatible. Note Most Cisco routers support the Cisco tunnel, while only a few support both GRE and Cisco IP tunnels.
OSPF Metric	Displays the cost for sending packets across the GRE tunnel. Cost is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path.
Create	Click Create to create a new GRE tunnel route.
Edit	Click Edit to edit an existing GRE tunnel.
Delete	Click Delete to delete an existing GRE tunnel.

B.8.1.14.8  IS-IS RIB Subtab

The IS-IS RIB subtab allows you to view the Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System protocol routing information base. IS-IS is an OSI link-state hierarchical routing protocol that floods the network with link-state information that enables the NEs to build a complete and consistent picture of a network topology.

Table B-204 Field Descriptions for the IS-IS RIB Subtab 

Field	Description
Router Number	Displays the OSI router number. The ONS 15454 SDH provides three virtual routers numbered 1 through 3.
Subnet Type	Indicates the OSI subnetwork point-of-attachment type used to access the destination address. It includes SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, and LAN.
Destination Address	Displays the Network Service Access Point (NSAP).
MAC Address	Displays the NE's Media Access Control (MAC) address for destinations that are accessed by the LAN subnets.

B.8.1.14.9  ES-IS RIB Subtab

The ES-IS RIB subtab allows you to view the End System to Intermediate System (ES-IS) protocol routing information base (RIB). ES-IS is an OSI protocol that defines how end systems (hosts) and intermediate systems (routers) learn about each other.

Table B-205 Field Descriptions for the ES-IS RIB Subtab 

Field	Description
Router Number	Displays the OSI router number. The ONS 15454 SDH provides three virtual routers numbered 1 through 3.
Subnet Type	Indicates the OSI subnetwork point-of-attachment type used to access the destination address. It includes SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, and LAN.
Destination Address	Displays the Network Service Access Point (NSAP) of the destination ES.
MAC Address	Displays the NE's Media Access Control (MAC) address for destinations that are accessed by the LAN subnets.

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.9  ONS 15501 NE Explorer

The ONS 15501 NE Explorer displays read-only information about the ONS 15501 NE. (See Figure B-14.) Use the NE Explorer to retrieve the current values and thresholds for the ONS 15501 AC and DC.

Figure B-14 NE Explorer—ONS 15501

The NE Explorer contains the following tabs:

•Identification Tab

•Physical Tab

•Power Source Tab

The data in the NE Explorer is refreshed every time you open the NE Explorer. You can click the Refresh Data button and choose to refresh the displayed information from the CTM server or from the NE. You can choose Configuration > ONS 155XX > Equipment Inventory Table to view equipment inventory information for the NE.

B.9.1  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays inventory information about the ONS 15501 AC and DC.

Table B-206 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the ID of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
Description	Displays the description of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
NE Model	Displays the NE model type.
NE Type	Displays the type of NE.
Vendor Name	Displays the vendor name, Cisco Systems.
Software Version	Displays the software version that is running on the NE.
Version Name	Displays a string name tag that identifies the NE and the associated software version.
Location Name	Displays the user-defined location of the NE.

B.9.2  Physical Tab

The Physical tab displays physical information about the ONS 15501 AC and DC.

Table B-207 Field Descriptions for the Physical Tab 

Field	Description
Point of Measure	Indicates whether the point of measure is Optical Input Power, Optical Output Power, Optical Output Signal Power, Optical Power Gain, or Device Temperature.
Current Value	Shows the current value of the point of measure in dBm, dB, or degrees Celsius.
Mean Threshold	Shows the alarm mean level for the point of measure.
Threshold Trigger	Shows the alarm trigger level for the point of measure. If the point of measure exceeds the mean threshold plus the threshold trigger, and if an alarm does not already exist, an alarm is raised. If the point of measure falls below the mean threshold minus the threshold trigger, and if an alarm exists, the alarm is cleared.

B.9.3  Power Source Tab

The Power Source tab displays power source information for the ONS 15501 DC. This tab is disabled for the ONS 15501 AC.

Table B-208 Field Descriptions for the Power Source Tab

Field	Description
Power Source	Displays the available sources of the power supply on the selected NE. Values are Power Supply 1 or Power Supply 2.
Current Value	Displays the value of the DC power, in volts, for the corresponding power supply.
Alarm Status	Displays the status of alarms on the corresponding power supply.

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.10  ONS 15530 and ONS 15540

The NE Explorer is not available for the ONS 15530 and ONS 15540. Equivalent functionality is provided through launching CiscoView from CTM; choose Configuration > ONS 155XX > Launch CiscoView. CiscoView shows a continuously updated shelf view of device configuration and performance. (See Figure B-15.) Moving the pointer to the device or one of its components and clicking the right mouse button displays a shortcut menu with options for configuring the device, cards, and interfaces, and for monitoring real-time statistics.

Figure B-15 CiscoView for the ONS 15540 ESP

For information about CiscoView, see Appendix I, "Using CiscoView to Configure and Monitor ONS 15501, ONS 15530, and ONS 15540 NEs."

B.11  ONS 15600 SONET NE Explorer

When you choose Configuration > NE Explorer for the ONS 15600 SONET, the window displayed by CTM consists of a tree on the left side and a properties pane on the right. (See Figure B-16.) The tree provides a hierarchical view and alarm status of the NE's physical shelves and slots. The properties pane shows information about the selected entity (NE or slot). See Node Properties Pane—ONS 15600 for more information.

Figure B-16 NE Explorer—ONS 15600 SONET

---

Note If CTC is launched from the web browser for an ONS 15600 node, the CTC GUI might look different from when it is launched from CTM. This discrepancy occurs because the latest version of CTC (for NE releases supported by CTM) is packaged with CTM. If launched from a browser, the CTC software is retrieved from the NE itself, which might be a version different from that packaged with CTM.

---

When an NE Explorer is in autorefresh mode, all values of an entity that is being edited by the user are automatically refreshed. You will lose all of your changes unless you click the Apply button. To enable autorefresh, click the Refresh Data button in the NE Explorer.

B.11.1  Node Properties Pane—ONS 15600

The node properties pane displays information about the ONS 15600 SONET NE. The ONS 15600 properties pane contains the following tabs, some of which apply only to a specific NE version:

•Shelf View Tab

•Identification Tab

•Network Tab

•DCC Tab

•Timing Tab

•Protection Tab

•NE Defaults Tab

•Security Tab

•Alarm Tab

•Maintenance Tab

•Alarm Extenders Tab

•BLSR Tab

•OSI Tab

B.11.1.1  Shelf View Tab

The Shelf View tab displays a graphic of the ONS 15600 that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Moving the mouse pointer over the NE, its shelves, slots, or cards displays the current alarms for the shelf, slot, or card. Double-clicking a slot or card displays the slot or card in the properties pane. The right-click menu allows you to reset, delete, or change a card. For unprovisioned slots, the right-click menu allows you to add a card.

B.11.1.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays identification information about the ONS 15600 NE.

Table B-209 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the ID of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
Description	Displays the description of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
NE Model	Displays the NE model type.
Software Version	Displays the current running version of the system software.
Contact	Displays the name of the node contact person and the phone number.
System Description	Displays a description of the NE.
SNTP Settings
Use NTP/SNTP Server	If checked, CTC uses an SNTP server to set the date and time of the node. Using an SNTP server ensures that all ONS 15600 network nodes use the same date and time reference. The server synchronizes the node's time after power outages or software upgrades. If you check the Use NTP/SNTP Server check box, enter the server's IP address in the next field. If you do not use an SNTP server, complete the Time and Time Zone fields. The ONS 15600 will use these fields for alarm dates and times.
SNTP Server	Displays the SNTP server IP address.
Location
Latitude	Allows you to set the latitude of the NE. Select North or South from the drop-down list; then, enter the degrees and minutes (or click the up and down arrows to increase or decrease each by 1 unit).
Longitude	Allows you to set the longitude of the NE. Select East or West from the drop-down list; then, enter the degrees and minutes (or click the up and down arrows to increase or decrease each by 1 unit).
Date and Time
Time	Displays the NE date and time.
Time Zone	Displays the time zone where the NE is located.
Use Daylight Savings Time	If checked, Daylight Savings Time is observed.

B.11.1.3  Network Tab

The Network tab displays information about the NE network address. The Network tab contains the following subtabs:

•Address Subtab

•Static Routes Subtab

•OSPF Subtab

•OSPF Area Range Subtab

•OSPF Virtual Links Subtab

•SNMP Subtab

•Firewall/Proxy Subtab

•Routing Table Subtab

•Internal Subnet Subtab

•Proxy Tunnels Subtab

•Firewall Tunnels Subtab

B.11.1.3.1  Address Subtab

The Address subtab allows you to view and change information about the NE network address.

Table B-210 Field Descriptions for the Address Subtab 

Field	Description
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the NE.
Default Router	Displays the IP address of the default router.
Subnet Mask	Displays the subnetwork mask ID of the NE.
MAC Address	Displays the ONS 15600 address as it is identified on the IEEE 802 MAC layer.
Forward DHCP Requests	If checked, forwards DHCP requests to the IP address entered in the DHCP Server field. When the Forward DHCP Requests check box is unchecked, the field is read-only.
DHCP Server	Displays the IP address of the DHCP server.

B.11.1.3.2  Static Routes Subtab

The Static Routes subtab allows you to view information about CTM and ONS 15600 SONET connectivity and create or delete static routes.

Table B-211 Field Descriptions for the Static Routes Subtab 

Field	Description
Destination IP	Displays the IP address of the computer running CTM.
Subnet Mask	Displays the subnetwork mask.
Next Hop	Displays the IP address of the router port or the node IP address if the CTM computer is connected to the node directly.
Cost	Displays the number of hops between the ONS 15600 and the computer.

B.11.1.3.3  OSPF Subtab

The OSPF subtab displays OSPF information. OSPF is a link state Internet routing protocol.

Table B-212 Field Descriptions for the OSPF Subtab 

Field	Description
Slot	Displays the slot number.
Port	Displays the port number.
DCC OSPF Area ID	Displays the number that identifies the ONS 15600s as a unique OSPF area. The OSPF area number can be from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The number must be unique to the LAN OSPF area.
SDCC Metric	Sets a cost for sending packets across the SDCC, which is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. This value should always be higher than the LAN metric. The Cisco default DCC metric is 100. This value is normally unchanged.
LDCC Metric	Sets a cost for sending packets across the LDCC, which is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. This value should always be higher than the LAN metric. This value is normally unchanged.
OSPF Active on LAN	If checked, enables ONS 15600 OSPF topology to be advertised to OSPF routers on the LAN. Enable this field on ONS 15600s that directly connect to OSPF routers.
LAN Port Area ID	Displays the OSPF area ID for the router port where the ONS 15600 is connected. (This number is different from the DCC OSPF Area ID.)
Router Priority	Displays the value used for this NE in designated router election. The Cisco default value is zero (0). A router that has Router Priority set to 0 is ineligible to become a designated router on the attached network.
Dead Interval	Displays the number of seconds that will pass while an OSPF router's packets are not visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the Cisco default.
Retransmit Interval	Displays the time that will elapse before a packet is resent. Five seconds is the Cisco default.
Hello Interval	Displays the number of seconds between OSPF hello packet advertisements sent by OSPF routers. Ten seconds is the Cisco default.
Transit Delay	Displays the service speed. One second is the Cisco default.
LAN Metric	Displays a cost for sending packets across the LAN. This value should always be lower than the DCC metric. Ten is the Cisco default.
Authentication Type	Displays Simple Password if the router where the ONS 15600 is connected uses authentication. Otherwise, it displays No Authentication.
Authentication Key	Displays the OSPF key (password) if authentication is enabled.
Confirm Authentication Key	Retype the authentication key to confirm it.

B.11.1.3.4  OSPF Area Range Subtab

The OSPF Area Range subtab allows you to view information about OSPF area ranges and create or delete area ranges.

Table B-213 Field Descriptions for the OSPF Area Range Subtab 

Field	Description
Range Address	Displays the area IP address for the ONS 15600s that reside within the OSPF area. For example, if the ONS 15600 OSPF area includes nodes with IP addresses 10.10.20.100, 10.10.30.150, 10.10.40.200, and 10.10.50.250, the range address would be 10.10.0.0.
Range Area ID	Displays the OSPF area ID for the ONS 15600s. This is either the ID in the DCC OSPF Area ID field or the ID in the Area ID for LAN Port field.
Mask Length	Displays the subnet mask length.
Mask	Displays the subnet mask IP address.
Advertise	Indicates whether the OSPF routing table is advertised.

B.11.1.3.5  OSPF Virtual Links Subtab

The OSPF Virtual Links subtab allows you to view information about OSPF virtual links and create or delete virtual links.

---

Note You cannot create a new virtual link unless OSPF is active on the LAN.

---

Table B-214 Field Descriptions for the OSPF Virtual Links Subtab 

Field	Description
Neighbor	Displays the router ID of the Area 0 router.
Transit Delay	Displays the service speed. One second is the Cisco default.
Retransmit Interval	Displays the time that will elapse before a packet is resent. Five seconds is the Cisco default.
Hello Interval	Displays the number of seconds between OSPF hello packet advertisements sent by OSPF routers. Ten seconds is the Cisco default.
Dead Interval	Displays the number of seconds that will pass while the packets of an OSPF router are not visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the Cisco default.
Authentication Type	Displays the authentication type.
Authentication Key	Displays the authentication key.

B.11.1.3.6  SNMP Subtab

The SNMP subtab allows you to view SNMP information and create or delete SNMP trap destinations.

Table B-215 Field Descriptions for the SNMP Subtab 

Field	Description
IP Address	The IP address of the NMS.
Community Name	The SNMP community name. Note The SNMP community string cannot be blank in CTM. If a blank community string is required in CTC builds earlier than R4.6, you must set the blank community string in CTC.
UDP Port	The UDP port for SNMP. The Cisco default UDP port is 162.
Trap Version	The trap version, either SNMP version 1 or version 2. See your NMS documentation to determine whether to use SNMP version 1 or version 2.

B.11.1.3.7  Firewall/Proxy Subtab

The Firewall/Proxy subtab allows you to use an NE as a proxy server and/or as a firewall.

Table B-216 Field Descriptions for the Firewall/Proxy Subtab 

Field

Description

Enable Proxy Server on Port

If checked, the ONS 15600 SONET serves as a proxy for connections between the CTM server and ONS 15600 SONET NEs that are DCC-connected to the proxy node. The CTM server establishes connections to DCC-connected nodes through the proxy node. The CTM server can connect to nodes that it cannot directly reach from the host on which it runs. The proxy server port number (read-only) is displayed following the Enable Proxy Server on Port field. The proxy server uses port number 1080. If checked, the following radio buttons are enabled: •External Network Element (ENE)—Enables the ONS 15600 SONET to proxy as an ENE. •Gateway Network Element (GNE)—Enables the ONS 15600 SONET as a GNE. •Proxy-only—Enables proxy only. If unchecked, the node does not proxy. Caution Disabling the proxy prevents the NE from relaying packets to DCC-only connected NEs, and can lead to a loss of connectivity.

B.11.1.3.8  Routing Table Subtab

The Routing Table subtab allows you to view the OSPF routing table.

Table B-217 Field Descriptions for the Routing Table Subtab 

Field	Description
Destination	Displays the IP address of the destination network or host. Destination (0.0.0.0) is the default route entry. All undefined destination network or host entries on this routing table will be mapped to the default route entry.
Mask	Displays the subnet mask used to reach the destination host or network. Mask (0.0.0.0) is always 0 for the default route.
Gateway	Displays the IP address of the gateway used to reach the destination network or host. All outbound traffic belonging to this network is sent to this gateway. Gateway (172.20.214.1) is the default gateway address. All outbound traffic that cannot be found in this routing table or is not on the node's local subnet will be sent to this gateway.
Usage	Shows the number of times the listed route has been used.
Interface	Shows the ONS 15600 interface used to access the destination. Values are: •cpm0—The ONS 15600 Ethernet interface (that is, the RJ-45 jack on the TCC+/TCC2 and the LAN 1 pins on the backplane) •pdcc0—An SDCC interface (that is, an OC-N trunk card identified as the SDCC termination) •lo0—A loopback interface

B.11.1.3.9  Internal Subnet Subtab

The Internal Subnet subtab allows you to change the class B subnet address for timing and shelf controller (TSC) cards. TSC cards perform all system-timing functions for each ONS 15600 SONET. To avoid IP address conflicts, you should change the class B subnet address if your internal network uses the same address range as the default subnet addresses.

Table B-218 Field Descriptions for the Internal Subnet Subtab 

Field	Description
TSC1	Enter the class B subnet address for the first TSC.
TSC2	If two TSCs are installed, enter the class B subnet address for the second TSC.

B.11.1.3.10  Proxy Tunnels Subtab

The Proxy Tunnels subtab allows you to configure source and destination information for proxy tunnels.

Table B-219 Field Descriptions for the Proxy Tunnels Subtab 

Field	Description
Source Address	Specify the source IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.
Source Mask	Specify the source subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.
Destination Address	Specify the destination IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.
Destination Mask	Specify the destination subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the proxy server.

B.11.1.3.11  Firewall Tunnels Subtab

The Firewall Tunnels subtab allows you to configure source and destination information for firewall tunnels.

Table B-220 Field Descriptions for the Firewall Tunnels Subtab 

Field	Description
Source Address	Specify the source IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.
Source Mask	Specify the source subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.
Destination Address	Specify the destination IP address in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.
Destination Mask	Specify the destination subnetwork mask in the source-destination pair for the tunnel that will be routed through the firewall.

B.11.1.4  DCC Tab

The DCC tab allows you to create, delete, and view SONET and SDH DCCs.

Table B-221 Field Descriptions for the DCC Tab 

Field	Description
SDCC
SDCC Terminations	Displays the slot, port, and card type of an SDCC termination.
OSPF Disabled on Link	Check to prevent the advertisement of the OSPF routing table.
Foreign	A check mark indicates that the far-end node is a non-ONS node.
Foreign IP	Displays the foreign node IP address.
LAPD Config	Displays the LAP-D parameters for the SDCCs that are provisioned as OSI only.
OSI SNPA	If the SDCC is provisioned for OSI, the following SNPA information is displayed: •Router—Indicates the ONS router and NSAP address. •Router State—Indicates whether the router is enabled or disabled.
Service State	Select the state of the termination: •IS-NR—In Service-Normal. •OOS-AU—Out of Service-Autonomous. •OOS-MA—Out of Service-Management. •OOS-AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management. In addition, a secondary state provides additional information about the status of the entity. Values for secondary state are: •MEA—Mismatch of equipment due to invalid equipment insertion. •UEQ—Unequipped; there is nothing in the slot. •UAS—Unassigned; the entity does not exist, has not been created, or has been deleted. •SWDL—Software download in progress. •MT—Maintenance, as per the Admin State change. •AINS—Automatic in service. •DSBLD—Traffic is disabled on the entity. •LPBK—Port or connection has a loopback on it. •FLT—Fault secondary state. When an entity is faulted, an FLT state is raised. Equipment and ports in FLT state should be cleared as they transition. Transition states are listed in Table 11-10 on page 11-14. See Table 11-10 on page 11-14 for the Service state-Secondary state possible values. Note If the NE release does not support the Service state, this field shows N/A.
LDCC
LDCC Terminations	Displays the slot, port, and card type of an LDCC termination.
OSPF Disabled on Link	Check to prevent the advertisement of the OSPF routing table.
Foreign	A check mark indicates that the far-end node is a non-ONS node.
Foreign IP	Displays the foreign node IP address.
LAPD Config	Displays the LAP-D parameters for the LDCCs that are provisioned as OSI only.
OSI SNPA	If the LDCC is provisioned for OSI, the following SNPA information is displayed: •Router—Indicates the ONS router and NSAP address. •Router State—Indicates whether the router is enabled or disabled.
Service State	Select the state of the LDCC termination: •IS-NR—In Service-Normal •OOS-AU—Out of Service-Autonomous •OOS-MA—Out of Service-Management •OOS-AUMA—Out of Service-Autonomous and Management In addition, a secondary state provides additional information about the status of the entity. Values for secondary state are: •MEA—Mismatch of equipment due to invalid equipment insertion •UEQ—Unequipped; there is nothing in the slot •UAS—Unassigned; the entity does not exist, has not been created, or has been deleted •SWDL—Software download in progress •MT—Maintenance, as per the Admin State change •AINS—Automatic in service •DSBLD—Traffic is disabled on the entity •LPBK—Port or connection has a loopback on it
Create button	Allows you to create new terminations on SONET or SDH cards.
Edit button	Allows you to modify existing terminations on SONET or SDH cards.
Delete button	Allows you to delete the selected SDCC or LDCC.

B.11.1.5  Timing Tab

The Timing tab contains the following subtabs:

•General Subtab

•Reference List Subtab

•Status Subtab

•Timing Report Subtab

B.11.1.5.1  General Subtab

The General subtab displays general timing information.

Table B-222 Field Descriptions for the General Subtab 

Field	Description
General Timing
Timing Mode	Set to External if the ONS 15600 derives its timing from a BITS source wired to the backplane pins; set to Line if timing is derived from an OC-N card that is optically connected to the timing node.
SSM Message Set	Choose the SSM set level supported by your network. SSM is a SONET protocol that communicates information about the quality of the timing source. SSM messages are carried on the S1 byte of the SONET Line layer. They enable SONET devices to automatically select the highest quality timing reference and to avoid timing loops. If a Generation 1 node receives a Generation 2 message, the message will be mapped down to the next available Generation 1. For example, an ST3E message becomes an ST3.
Revertive	If checked, the ONS 15600 reverts to a primary reference source after the conditions that caused it to switch to a secondary timing reference are corrected.
Reversion Time	Specify the reversion time in half-minute increments.
Quality of RES	If your timing source supports the reserved S1 byte, you set the timing quality here. (Most timing sources do not use RES.) Qualities are displayed in descending quality order as ranges. For example, ST3 < RES < ST2 means the timing reference is higher than a Stratum 3 and lower than a Stratum 2.
BITS-IN-OUT Facility Type
In Facility Type	Provision the BITS In facility type.
Out Facility Type	Provisions the BITS Out facility type.
BITS IN Facilities
In State	Set the BITS reference to IS (In Service) or OOS (Out of Service). For nodes set to Line timing with no equipment timed through BITS Out, set the state to OOS. For nodes using External timing or Line timing with equipment timed through BITS Out, set the state to IS.
Coding	Set to the coding used by your BITS reference, either B8ZS or AMI.
Framing	Set to the framing used by your BITS reference, either ESF or SF (D4). SSM is not available with Super Frame.
Sync Messaging	If checked, enables the Synchronization Status Message (SSM) for BITS In. (SSM is not available if Framing is set to Super Frame.)
BITS OUT Facilities
Out State	Set the BITS reference to IS or OOS. For nodes set to Line timing with no equipment timed through BITS Out, set the state to OOS. For nodes using External timing or Line timing with equipment timed through BITS Out, set the state to IS.
Coding	Set to the coding used by your BITS reference, either B8ZS or AMI.
Framing	Set to the framing used by your BITS reference, either ESF or SF (D4). SSM is not available with Super Frame.
AIS Threshold	If SSM is disabled or Super Frame is used, sets the quality level where a node sends an AIS from the BITS-1 Out and BITS-2 Out backplane pins. An AIS is raised when the optical source for the BITS reference falls to or below the SSM quality level defined in this field.

B.11.1.5.2  Reference List Subtab

The Reference List subtab provides timing reference information.

Table B-223 Field Descriptions for the Reference List Subtab 

Field	Description
NE References	Allows you to define three timing references (Ref-1, Ref-2, Ref-3). The node uses Reference 1 unless a failure occurs on that reference, in which case, the node uses Reference 2. If that fails, the node uses Reference 3, which is typically set to Internal Clock. This is the Stratum 3 clock provided on the TCC+. The options displayed depend on the Timing Mode setting. •Timing Mode set to External—Options are BITS-1, BITS-2, and Internal Clock. •Timing Mode set to Line—Options are the node's working optical cards and Internal Clock. Select the cards/ports that are directly or indirectly connected to the node wired to the BITS source, that is, the node's trunk cards. Set Reference 1 to the trunk card that is closest to the BITS source. For example, if Slot 5 is connected to the node wired to the BITS source, select Slot 5 as Reference 1. •Timing Mode set to Mixed—Both BITS and optical cards are available, allowing you to set a mixture of external BITS and optical trunk cards as timing references.
BITS-1 Out References	Allows you to define three timing references (Ref-1, Ref-2, Ref-3) for equipment wired to the BITS Out backplane pins. Normally, BITS Out is used with line nodes, so the options displayed are the working optical cards. BITS-1 and BITS-2 Out are enabled as soon as BITS-1 and BITS-2 facilities are placed in service.
BITS-2 Out References	Allows you to define three timing references (Ref-1, Ref-2, Ref-3) for equipment wired to the BITS Out backplane pins. Normally, BITS Out is used with line nodes, so the options displayed are the working optical cards. BITS-1 and BITS-2 Out are enabled as soon as BITS-1 and BITS-2 facilities are placed in service.

B.11.1.5.3  Status Subtab

The Status subtab displays timing status information.

---

Note If you change any values in the Status subtab and click Apply at the bottom of the screen, the values are not set. Instead, use the following buttons to apply changes:

•Clear—Releases any existing switch request. For example, if you issue a Force Switch and then issue a Clear, the Force Switch request is released.

•Manual Switch—Switches the timing reference from one source to another.

•Force Switch—Switches the timing reference from one source to another. This request has a higher priority than the Manual Switch request.

---

Table B-224 Field Descriptions for the Status Subtab 

Field	Description
NE Clock
NE Reference	Set the NE timing reference to internal, BITS-1, or BITS-2.
Status	Displays the status of the NE clock.
Operations	Execute a switch on the NE timing reference.
BITS-1 Out
BITS-1 Out	Set the BITS-1 out timing reference.
Status	Displays the status of the BITS-1 out timing reference.
Operations	Execute a switch on the BITS-1 out timing reference.
BITS-2 Out
BITS-2 Out	Set the BITS-2 out timing reference.
Status	Displays the status of the BITS-2 out timing reference.
Operations	Execute a switch on the BITS-2 out timing reference.

B.11.1.5.4  Timing Report Subtab

The Timing Report subtab summarizes the NE's current timing settings.

B.11.1.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab contains the following subtabs:

•Protection Groups Subtab

•Operations Subtab

B.11.1.6.1  Protection Groups Subtab

The Protection Groups subtab displays a list of available protection groups and allows you to create, delete, and view protection groups.

Table B-225 Field Descriptions for the Protection Groups Subtab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups
Displays a list of available protection groups. Click the Create or Delete button to create a new protection group or delete an existing one.
Selected Protection Group
Name	Modify the name of the selected protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Type	Choose the protection type (1:1, 1:N, or 1+1) from the drop-down list. The protection selected determines the cards that are available to serve as protect and working cards. For example, if you choose 1:N protection, only DS-1N and DS-3N cards are displayed. 1+1 protection is only used for optical cards.
Protect Module	Choose the protect card if using 1:1 or 1:N protection.
Available Entities	Displays a list of available entities. You can toggle between available and working entities.
Working Entities	Displays a list of working entities. You can toggle between working and available entities.
Bidirectional Switching	Click if you want both the transmit and the receive channels to switch if a failure occurs on one. This option is only available if you select 1+1 (port) type.
Revertive	If checked, the ONS 15600 reverts traffic to the working card or port after failure conditions are corrected and remain correct for the amount of time entered in Reversion Time.
Reversion Time	If Revertive is checked, enter the amount of time following failure condition correction that should elapse before the ONS 15600 switches back to the working card or port.

B.11.1.6.2  Operations Subtab

The Operations subtab displays protection group operation information.

Table B-226 Field Descriptions for the Operations Subtab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection groups and allows you to execute switch commands.
Switch Commands	Allows you to perform a manual switch, perform a forced switch, or clear the existing command switching.
Inhibit Switching	Allows you to inhibit unlock switching, lock out switching, or lock on switching.

B.11.1.7  NE Defaults Tab

The NE Defaults tab displays a list of default thresholds for the ONS 15600 SONET NE. You can edit NE defaults for the ONS 15600 SONET R5.0 and later.

Table B-227 Field Descriptions for the NE Defaults Tab 

Field	Description
Parameter	Lists the default NE parameter.
Value	Shows the default parameter value, and allows you to change the default.
Units	Lists the unit of measure that corresponds to the default NE parameter.
Range	Lists the possible range of values for the default NE parameter. Note This field applies to the ONS 15600 SONET R6.0 and later.
Side Effects	Lists any side effects that could occur as a result of changing the default NE parameter. Note This field applies to the ONS 15600 SONET R6.0 and later.

You can load different NE defaults using the NE Defaults Management window. See 4.5.10  Restoring NE Defaults, page 4-78.

B.11.1.8  Security Tab

The Security tab allows you to view and edit security features for the ONS 15600 SONET NE. The security tab contains the following subtabs:

•Policy Subtab

•Password Subtab

•Access Subtab

•RADIUS Server Subtab

•Legal Disclaimer Subtab

B.11.1.8.1  Policy Subtab

The Policy subtab allows you to specify user security parameters.

---

Note If the user is already logged in, any changes to the NE user type settings become applicable only when the user next logs in.

---

Table B-228 Field Descriptions for the Policy Subtab 

Field	Description
Idle User Timeout
Each CTC or TL1 user can be idle during his or her login session for a specified amount of time before the CTC window is locked. The lockouts prevent unauthorized users from making changes. Higher-level users have shorter default idle periods and lower-level users have longer or unlimited default idle periods. The user idle period can be modified by a SuperUser. Note A user already logged into the node is not affected by a change to the Idle User Timeout policy.
Retrieve	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC Retrieve user.
Maintenance	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC Maintenance user.
Provisioner	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC Provisioner user.
SuperUser	Set the idle user timeout for a CTC SuperUser user.
User Lockout
Manual Unlock by SuperUser	If checked, the CTC SuperUser user must manually unlock locked out CTC users. If unchecked, locked out CTC users are automatically unlocked after the lockout duration period elapses.
Lockout Duration	Set the lockout duration period for locked out CTC users. This field is enabled only if the Manual Unlock by SuperUser check box is unchecked.
Failed Logins Allowed	Set the number of failed logins before the CTC user is automatically locked out.
Other
Single Sessions per User	If checked, each CTC user can only launch one session at a time.
Disable Inactive User	If checked, inactive users are disabled automatically for the amount of time in the Inactive Duration field.
Inactive Duration	Specify the inactive duration in days. The range is from 1 to 90 days; the Cisco default is 45 days. A value of 0 implies inactive duration is disabled and invalid.

B.11.1.8.2  Password Subtab

The Password subtab allows you to specify user password security parameters.

Table B-229 Field Descriptions for the Password Subtab 

Field	Description
Password Change
Prevent Reusing Last	Prevents setting a CTC user's current password to one of the most recent passwords. You can set the number of most recent passwords that cannot be reused.
Disable Password Flipping	If checked, users are not allowed to change passwords for the number of days specified in the Cannot Change New Password For field.
Can Change Password After	Enter the number of days that must elapse before the user can change the password.
Force Password Change After Assigned	If checked, during the first successful login, the user is forced to change the password.
Password Difference	Allows SuperUsers to specify the number of characters by which the new password of a user must differ from the old password, while performing a password change. The default value is 1. The range is from 1 to 5 characters.
Password Aging
Enable Password Aging	Check this check box to enable password aging.
Aging Period	Enter the aging period, in days, for Retrieve, Maintenance, Provisioner, and SuperUser CTC users. After the aging period expires, CTC users are forced to change their passwords.
Warning Period	Enter the warning period, in days, for Retrieve, Maintenance, Provisioner, and SuperUser CTC users. After the warning period expires, CTC users are warned that their passwords will soon expire.

B.11.1.8.3  Access Subtab

The Access subtab allows you to configure LAN and shell access to the NE.

Table B-230 Field Descriptions for the Access Subtab 

Field	Description
Access
LAN Access	Specify the type of LAN access allowed. Values are Backplane Only, No LAN Access, Front and Backplane, or Front Only (for ONS 15454 SONET NEs only). Note After setting the LAN access to the backplane, the CTM client is unusable for 4 to 5 minutes.
Restore Timeout	This time period begins if No LAN Access is selected and all DCC connections are lost. If the time expires before a DCC is restored, LAN access is restored so that the node is not isolated. When the DCC comes back, LAN access returns to its specified settings. The range is from 0 (never) to 60 minutes; the Cisco default is 5 minutes.
Serial Craft Access (available for ONS 15600 SONET NEs R6.0 and later)
Enable Craft Port A	Check this check box to enable craft port A.
Enable Craft Port B	Check this check box to enable craft port B.
Shell Access
Shell Access on	Specify shell access on Telnet or SSH.
SSH Port	Indicates the SSH port number that will be used if the SSH radio button is selected.
Telnet Port	This is enabled if you selected the Telnet radio button. Enter the Telnet port number.
Use Standard Telnet Port	If checked, the standard Telnet port is used for Telnet access.
Shell Access (available for ONS 15600 SONET NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the Shell access state from the pull-down menu. You can select Disable, Non-secure, or Secure.
SSH Port	Indicates the SSH port number that will be used.
Telnet Port	This is enabled if you selected the Non-secure access state. Enter the Telnet port number that will be used.
Use Standard Telnet Port	Check this check box to indicate that the standard Telnet port will be used.
EMS Access (available for ONS 15600 SONET NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the EMS access state from the pull-down menu. You can select either Non-secure or Secure.
CORBA Listener Port	Select the port numbers for the TCC CORBA (IIOP) listener port and the TCC CORBA (SSLIOP) listener port. Select one of the following radio buttons: •Default-Fixed—Assigns a default port number. •Standard Constant—Port number for the TCC CORBA (IIOP) listener port will be 683. Port number for the TCC CORBA (SSLIOP) listener port will be 684. •Other Constant—When selected, enter the port number that will be used.
TL1 Access (available for ONS 15600 SONET NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the TL1 access state from the pull-down menu. You can select Disable, Non-secure, or Secure.
SNMP Access (available for ONS 15600 SONET NEs R6.0 and later)
Access State	Select the SNMP access state from the pull-down menu. You can select either Disable or Non-secure.
Other
PM Clearing Privilege	Select the users privilege that allows clearing PM statistics for the NE.

B.11.1.8.4  RADIUS Server Subtab

The RADIUS Server subtab allows you to configure, create, modify, and delete RADIUS servers for the ONS 15600 SONET R6.0 and later.

Table B-231 Field Descriptions for the RADIUS Server Subtab 

Field	Description
Enable RADIUS Authentication	Check this check box to enable RADIUS authentication.
Enable RADIUS Accounting	Check this check box to enable RADIUS accounting. This is enabled if the Enable RADIUS Authentication check box is checked.
Enable the Node as the Final Authenticator When no RADIUS server is reachable	Select a row from the RADIUS Servers in Order of Authentication table; then, check this check box. This indicates that the RADIUS server that you selected will be the final authenticator when there are no more RADIUS servers that can be reached.
Create	Click this button to create a RADIUS server. See 8.4.2.1.1  Creating a RADIUS Server, page 8-50
Edit	Click this button to modify an existing RADIUS server's information. See 8.4.2.1.2  Modifying a RADIUS Server, page 8-50.
Delete	Click this button to delete an existing RADIUS server. See 8.4.2.1.3  Deleting a RADIUS Server, page 8-50.
Move Up/Move Down	Select the Move Up and Move Down buttons to reorder the list of RADIUS servers in the RADIUS Servers in Order of Authentication table.
RADIUS Servers in Order of Authentication
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the RADIUS server.
Shared Secret	Displays a text string that serves as a password between a RADIUS client and RADIUS server.
Authentication Port	Displays the authentication port number of the RADIUS server. Default access is through port number 1812.
Accounting Port	Displays the accounting port number of the RADIUS server. Default access is through port number 1813.

B.11.1.8.5  Legal Disclaimer Subtab

The Legal Disclaimer subtab allows you to edit the NEs advisory message and preview the disclaimer.

Table B-232 Field Descriptions for the Legal Disclaimer Subtab 

Subtab	Description
Advisory Message	The existing message is a default, noncustomer-specific disclaimer. If you want to edit this statement with specifics for your company, you can change the text. You can also use the following HTML commands to format the text: <b> Begins boldface font </b> Ends boldface font <center> Aligns type in the center of the window </center> Ends the center alignment <font=n, where n = point size> Changes the font to the new size </font> Ends the font size command <p> Creates a line break <sub> Begins subscript </sub> Ends subscript <sup> Begins superscript </sup> Ends superscript <u> Starts underline </u> Ends underline
Preview	Allows you to view the advisory message before saving it.

B.11.1.9  Alarm Tab

The Alarm tab allows you to change default alarm severities by creating unique alarm profiles for individual ONS 15600 SONET nodes. The Alarm tab contains the following subtabs:

•Profile Subtab

•Alarm Behavior Subtab

B.11.1.9.1  Profile Subtab

The Profile subtab allows you to select, create, or delete alarm profiles.

Table B-233 Field Descriptions for the Profile Subtab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile Name	Choose an alarm profile for the NE from the drop-down list. Click Create to create a new alarm profile for the NE. Click Delete to delete an alarm profile from the NE.
Condition	Displays the alarm condition.
Severity	Displays the alarm severity.

B.11.1.9.2  Alarm Behavior Subtab

The Alarm behavior subtab allows you to change default alarm severities by creating unique alarm profiles.

Table B-234 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Subtab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Choose a global alarm profile for the NE from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed.
Slot Number	Displays the location of the module.
Equipment Type	Displays the type of module in the slot.
Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the slot from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	Indicates whether or not the alarms for the particular card are suppressed. If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.

B.11.1.10  Maintenance Tab

The ONS 15600 SONET hardware keeps track of which copies of data (backplane STS), SYNC, O&M, and CLK are currently being used by I/O and CXC cards.

B.11.1.10.1  Preferred Copy Subtab

The Preferred Copy subtab allows you to change the preferred data source and view the clock and SYNC copy.

Table B-235 Field Descriptions for the Preferred Copy Subtab 

Field	Description
Preferred Data	Allows you to select the data copy (CXC) when both the CXC cards are present in the system.
Selected Data	Displays the data copy currently being used.
Preferred Clock	Displays the preferred clock and SYNC copy.
Selected Clock	Displays the clock and SYNC copy currently being used.

B.11.1.11  Alarm Extenders Tab

The Alarm Extenders tab allows you view external alarm information. The Alarm Extenders tab contains the following subtabs:

•External Alarms Subtab

•External Controls Subtab

B.11.1.11.1  External Alarms Subtab

The External Alarms subtab allows you to view and update external alarm information.

Table B-236 Field Descriptions for the External Alarms Subtab 

Field	Description
Input Number	The alarm input number.
Enabled	Check to activate the fields for the alarm input number.
Alarm Type	Choose an alarm type from the provided list.
Severity	Choose a severity from the list.
Raised When	Choose the contact condition that will trigger the alarm in CTC.
Virtual Wire	To assign the external device to a virtual wire, choose a virtual wire from the list, or choose None if no assignment is required.
Description	A default description is provided in this line for every external alarm that is enabled.
Raised	Indicates if an alarm has been raised.
Contact Status	Indicates the current status of the contact.

B.11.1.11.2  External Controls Subtab

The External Controls subtab allows you to view and update external controls.

Table B-237 Field Descriptions for the External Controls Subtab 

Field	Description
Control Number	The control number.
Enabled	Check to activate the fields for the control number.
Control Type	Choose a control type from the provided list.
Trigger Type	Choose a trigger type: a local minor, major, or critical alarm; a remote minor, major, or critical alarm; or a virtual wire activation.
Description	Enter a description.
Current State	The current state of the control.
Auto State	The auto state of the control.
Contact Setting	The current contact setting.

B.11.1.12  BLSR Tab

The BLSR tab allows you to view BLSR information and create or delete BLSRs.

Table B-238 Field Descriptions for the BLSR Tab 

Field	Description
Fiber Type	Indicates whether the fiber type is 2-fiber or 4-fiber.
Rate	Select the BLSR rate.
Ring Name	Assign a ring ID (a number from 0 to 9999). Nodes in the same BLSR must have the same ring ID.
Node ID	Assign a node ID. The node ID identifies the node to the BLSR. Nodes in the same BLSR must have unique node IDs.
Ring Reversion	Set the amount of time that will pass before the traffic reverts to the original working path. The Cisco default is 5 minutes. All nodes in a BLSR ring should have the same ring reversion setting, particularly if never (nonrevertive) is selected.
Span Reversion	Set the amount of time to pass before the span reverts to the working path.
East Line	Assign the east BLSR port.
East Switch	Displays a list of switch commands for the east port.
West Line	Assign the west BLSR port.
West Switch	Displays a list of switch commands for the west port.
East Protect	Assign the east BLSR protect port.
West Protect	Assign the west BLSR protect port.

B.11.1.13  OSI Tab

The OSI tab allows you to provision ONS 15600 SONET Open System Interconnection (OSI) parameters. It contains the following subtabs:

•Main Setup Subtab

•TARP-Config Subtab

•TARP-TDC Subtab

•TARP-MAT Subtab

•Routers-Setup Subtab

•Subnets Subtab

•Tunnels Subtab

•IS-IS RIB Subtab

•ES-IS RIB Subtab

B.11.1.13.1  Main Setup Subtab

The Main Setup subtab allows you to provision the OSI Network Entity Title (NET) address and the OSI routing mode.

Table B-239 Field Descriptions for the Main Setup Subtab 

Field	Description
Main Network Entity Title	Displays the node NET. The NET is used in OSI networks to identify the node to the end system (ES) or intermediate system (IS).
End System	Provisions the node as an OSI End System (ES). ESs send End System Hello (ESH) messages regularly to announce their presence to neighboring ISs and ESs.
Intermediate System Level 1	Provisions the node as an OSI Intermediate System (IS). ISs send Intermediate System Hello (ISH) messages regularly to announce their presence to neighboring ISs and ESs.
Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2	The ONS 15600 SONET performs all IS functions. It communicates with other IS and ES nodes within an OSI area and broadcasts ISHs to IS nodes in other areas to which it is connected. For the ONS 15600 SONET, Intermediate System Level 1/Level 2 is the default routing mode.
Node Routing Mode
L1 LSP Buffer Size	Sets the Level 1 Link State Protocol (LSP) data unit buffer size. The Cisco default 512.
L2 LSP Buffer Size	Sets the Level 2 Link State Protocol (LSP) data unit buffer size. The Cisco default 512.

B.11.1.13.2  TARP-Config Subtab

The TARP Config subtab allows you to provision the TID Address Resolution protocol (TARP). TARP is used when TL1 TIDs must be translated to an NSAP address. During the TID-to-NSAP translation, the TID is mapped to a NET; then, the NSAP is derived from the NET based on the NSAP selector value.

Table B-240 Field Descriptions for the TARP-Config Subtab 

Field	Description
TARP PDUs L1 Propagation	If checked (default), TARP Type 1 PDUs received by the node that are not excluded by the loop detection buffer are propagated to other NEs within the OSI Level 1 area. Type 1 PDUs request a protocol address that matches a target TID within a Level1 routing area. The propagation does not occur if the NE is the target of the Type 1 PDU and the PDUs are not propagated to the NE from which the PDU was received. Note This parameter is not used when the node is set to End System.
TARP PDUs Origination	If checked (default), the node performs all TARP configuration functions, including: •TID-to-NSAP resolution requests •NSAP-to-TID requests •TARP address changes Note TARP Echo and NSAP to TID are not supported.
L2 TARP Data Cache	If checked (default), the TIDs and NSAPs are added to the TDC before the node propagates the requests to other NEs. Note This parameter is designed for IS Level 1/Level 2 nodes that are connected to other IS Level 1/Level 2 nodes. Enabling the parameter for IS Level 1 nodes is not recommended.
MAT 2	Lists the static manual area table entries.
LAN TARP Storm Suppression	If checked (default), enables the TARP storm suppression to prevent redundant TARP PDUs from being propagated across the network.
Type 4 PDU Delay	Sets the amount of time that will pass before the Type 4 PDU is generated. The Cisco default value is 60 seconds. The range is from 0 to 255 seconds.
TARP PDUs L2 Propagation	If checked (default), TARP Type 2 PDUs received by the node that are not excluded by the loop detection buffer are propagated to other NEs within the OSI Level 2 area. Type 2 PDUs request a protocol address that matches a target TID within a Level 2 routing area. The propagation occurs if the NE is the not the target of the Type 2 PDU and the PDUs are not propagated to the NE from which the PDU was received.
L1 TARP Data Cache	If checked, the node maintains a TARP data cache (TDC). The TDC is a database of TID to NSAP pairs created from TARP Type 3 PDUs received by the node. TARP 3 PDUs are responses to Type 1 and Type 2 PDUs and modified by TARP Type 4 PDUs (TID to NSAP updates or corrections).
MAT 1	Lists the static manual area table entries.
LDB	If checked, enables the TARP loop detection buffer (LDB). The LDB prevents TARP PDUs from being sent more than once on the same subnet.
Send Type 4 PDU on Startup	If checked, a TARP Type 4 PDU is originated during the initial ONS 15600 SONET startup. Type 4 PDUs indicate a TID or NSAP change has occurred at the NE. This is disabled by default.
Timers
LDB Entry	Sets the TARP LDB timer. The LDB buffer time is assigned to each LDB entry for which the TARP sequence number is zero. The Cisco default is 5 minutes. The range is from 1 to 10 minutes.
T1 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for response to a Type 1 Request PDU. Type 1 requests seek a specific NE TID within an OSI Level 1 area. The Cisco default is 15 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.
T3 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for an address resolution request. The Cisco default is 40 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.
LDB Flush	Sets the frequency period for flushing the LDB. The Cisco default is 5 minutes. The range is from 0 to 1440 minutes.
T2 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for a Type 2 Request PDU. TARP Type 2 requests seek a specific NE TID within an OSI Level 1 area. The Cisco default is 25 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.
T4 Timer	Sets the amount of time to wait for an error recovery. The timer begins after the T2 timer expires without successfully finding the NE TID. The Cisco default is 20 seconds. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds.

B.11.1.13.3  TARP-TDC Subtab

Table B-241 Field Descriptions for the TARP-TDC Subtab 

Field	Description
TID	Target ID that is statistically linked to an NSAP or NET. For ONS nodes, the TID is the node name.
NSAP/NET	The NSAP that is statistically linked to the TID.
Type	Indicates how the TARP data cache entry was created. It can be either: •Dynamic—The entry was created through the TARP propagation process. •Static—The entry was manually created and is a static entry.
Add Static Entry button	Click this button to statically link a TID to an NSAP or NET.
Delete Selected Entry button	Deletes the selected TID to NSAP/NET static entry.
TID to NSAP	Click this button to query the network for an NSAP that matches a TID.
Flush Dynamic Entries	Click this button to delete all dynamically generated TDC entries.

B.11.1.13.4  TARP-MAT Subtab

The TARP-MAT subtab allows you to manually provision a TARP adjacency.

Table B-242 Field Descriptions for the TARP-MAT Subtab 

Field	Description
Level	Sets the TARP Type Code that will be sent. •Level 1—Indicates that the manual area adjacency is within the same area as the node. The entry generates Type 1 PDUs. •Level 2—Indicates that the manual area adjacency is in an area different from the node. The entry generates Type 2 PDUs.
NSAP	The NSAP address of the node at the other end of the TARP manual adjacency.
Add	Click this button to create a TARP manual area adjacency.
Remove	Deletes the selected TID to NSAP/NET static entry.

B.11.1.13.5  Routers-Setup Subtab

The Routers-Setup subtab allows you to view and manage the OSI virtual routers.

Table B-243 Field Descriptions for the Routers-Setup Subtab 

Field	Description
Router Number	Displays the virtual router number. The ONS 15600 SONET provides six virtual routers numbered 1 through 6.
System ID	Displays the NSAP system ID of the virtual router. The NSAP system identifier is set to the node's first IEEE 802.3 MAC address + n, where n = 0 through 6. For the primary router (Router 1), n = 0.
Status	Indicates the virtual router status. Select Enabled or Disabled from the drop-down menu. Note Router 1 must be enabled before additional routers can be enabled.
Primary Area Address	Indicates the primary manual area address. For Router 1, this is the main NET for the node; that is, the NSAP without the system ID and selector (set to 00) fields.
Manual Area Address 1	Indicates the address of any additional manual areas that are created. Note An OSI area allows up to two additional manual areas in addition to the primary manual area.
Manual Area Address 2	Indicates the address of any additional manual areas that are created. Note An OSI area allows up to two additional manual areas in addition to the primary manual area.

B.11.1.13.6  Subnets Subtab

The Subnets subtab allows you to view and manage OSI subnetwork point-of-attachment parameters. The parameters are initially provisioned when you enable a subnet on an SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, or LAN interface.

Table B-244 Field Descriptions for the Subnets Subtab 

Field	Description
Router Number	The OSI virtual router where the subnet (SDCC, LDCC, GCC, or OSC) is provisioned.
Slot/Port	The subnet slot and port.
Type	The interface where the subnet is provisioned: SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, or LAN.
Protocol	The data link protocol that is provisioned for the subnet. It can be: •Point to Point Protocol (PPP) •Link Access Protocol on the D channel (LAP-D) •802.3 for LAN subnets
ISH	The Intermediate System Hello (ISH) PDU propagation frequency. Intermediate system NEs send ISHs to other ESs and ISs to inform them about the NETs they serve. The Cisco default is 10 seconds. The range is from 10 to 1000 seconds.
ESH	The End System Hello (ESH) PDU propagation frequency. End system NEs transmit ESHs to inform other ESs and ISs about the NSAPs they serve. The Cisco default is 10 seconds. The range is from 10 to 1000 seconds.
IIH	The Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System Hello (IIH) PDU propagation frequency. The IS-IS Hello PDUs establish and maintain adjacencies between ISs. The Cisco default is 3 seconds. The range is from 1 to 600 seconds.
DisPriority	The designated intermediate system (DIS) priority. In IS-IS networks, one router is elected as the DIS. For Cisco routers, the DIS priority is 64.
IS-IS Cost	The cost for sending packets on the subnet. This is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. The Cisco default value is 20.
Enable LAN Subnet button	(Router 1 only). Enables OSI over the LAN; that is, it activates the IS-IS protocol on the LAN so OSI traffic is enabled on the LAN.
Edit button	Click Edit to modify subnet parameters.
Disable LAN Subnet	(Router 1 only). Disables OSI over the LAN if it has been enabled.

B.11.1.13.7  Tunnels Subtab

The Tunnels subtab allows you to view, create, edit, and delete Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) and Cisco tunnels. GRE tunnels encapsulate one network protocol for transfer across another network layer. Within a mixed TCP/IP and OSI network, GRE tunnels tunnel IP traffic over an OSI NE and OSI traffic over an IP NE.

Table B-245 Field Descriptions for the Tunnels Subtab 

Field	Description
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the GRE destination CTM or CTC computer.
NetMask Address	Displays the IP address subnet mask of the destination CTM or CTC computer.
NSAP Address	The destination NE NSAP address. The NSAP selector (last two NSAP characters) must be 2f (GRE tunnel) or cc (proprietary Cisco tunnel), depending on which tunnel type you want to create. The Cisco proprietary tunnel is slightly more efficient than the GRE tunnel because it does not add an encapsulation header for each IP packet, while the GRE tunnel adds a small header to the packets. The two tunnel types are incompatible. Note Most Cisco routers support the Cisco tunnel, while only a few support both GRE and Cisco IP tunnels.
OSPF Metric	Displays the cost for sending packets across the GRE tunnel. Cost is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path.
Create	Click Create to create a new GRE tunnel route.
Edit	Click Edit to edit an existing GRE tunnel.
Delete	Click Delete to delete an existing GRE tunnel.

B.11.1.13.8  IS-IS RIB Subtab

The IS-IS RIB subtab allows you to view the Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System protocol routing information base. IS-IS is an OSI link-state hierarchical routing protocol that floods the network with link-state information that enables the NEs to build a complete and consistent picture of a network topology.

Table B-246 Field Descriptions for the IS-IS RIB Subtab 

Field	Description
Router Number	Displays the virtual router number. The ONS 15600 SONET provides six virtual routers numbered 1 through 6.
Subnet Type	Indicates the OSI subnetwork point-of-attachment type used to access the destination address. It includes SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, and LAN.
Destination Address	Displays the Network Service Access Point (NSAP).
MAC Address	Displays the NE's Media Access Control (MAC) address for destinations that are accessed by the LAN subnets.

B.11.1.13.9  ES-IS RIB Subtab

The ES-IS RIB subtab allows you to view the End System to Intermediate System (ES-IS) protocol routing information base (RIB). ES-IS is an OSI protocol that defines how end systems (hosts) and intermediate systems (routers) learn about each other.

Table B-247 Field Descriptions for the ES-IS RIB Subtab 

Field	Description
Router Number	Displays the virtual router number. The ONS 15600 SONET provides six virtual routers numbered 1 through 6.
Subnet Type	Indicates the OSI subnetwork point-of-attachment type used to access the destination address. It includes SDCC, LDCC, GCC, OSC, and LAN.
Destination Address	Displays the Network Service Access Point (NSAP) of the destination ES.
MAC Address	Displays the NE's Media Access Control (MAC) address for destinations that are accessed by the LAN subnets.

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.12  ONS 15600 SDH NE Explorer

When you choose Configuration > NE Explorer for the ONS 15600 SDH, the window displayed by CTM consists of a tree on the left side and a properties pane on the right. (See Figure B-17.) The tree provides a hierarchical view and alarm status of the NE's physical shelves and slots. The properties pane shows information about the selected entity (NE or slot). See Node Properties Pane—ONS 15600 SDH for more information.

Figure B-17 NE Explorer—ONS 15600 SDH

---

Note If CTC is launched from the web browser for an ONS 15600 SDH node, the CTC GUI might look different from when it is launched from CTM. This discrepancy occurs because the latest version of CTC (for NE releases supported by CTM) is packaged with CTM. If launched from a browser, the CTC software is retrieved from the NE itself, which might be a version different from that packaged with CTM.

---

When an NE Explorer is in autorefresh mode, all values of an entity that is being edited by the user are automatically refreshed. You will lose all of your changes unless you click the Apply button. To enable autorefresh, click the Refresh Data button in the NE Explorer.

B.12.1  Node Properties Pane—ONS 15600 SDH

The node properties pane displays information about the ONS 15600 SDH NE. The ONS 15600 SDH properties pane contains the following tabs, some of which apply only to a specific NE version:

•Shelf View Tab

•Identification Tab

•Network Tab

•DCC Tab

•Timing Tab

•Protection Tab

•NE Defaults Tab

•Security Tab

•Alarm Tab

•Maintenance Tab

•Alarm Extenders Tab

•MS-SPRing Tab

B.12.1.1  Shelf View Tab

The Shelf View tab displays a graphic of the ONS 15600 SDH that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Moving the mouse pointer over the NE, its shelves, slots, or cards displays the current alarms for the shelf, slot, or card. Double-clicking a slot or card displays the slot or card in the properties pane. The right-click menu allows you to reset, delete, or change a card. For unprovisioned slots, the right-click menu allows you to add a card.

B.12.1.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays identification information about the ONS 15600 SDH NE.

Table B-248 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the ID of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
Description	Displays the description of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
NE Model	Displays the NE model type.
Software Version	Displays the current running version of the system software.
Contact	Displays the name of the node contact person and the phone number.
System Description	Displays a description of the NE.
SNTP Settings
Use NTP/SNTP Server	If checked, CTC uses an SNTP server to set the date and time of the node. Using an SNTP server ensures that all ONS 15600 SDH network nodes use the same date and time reference. The server synchronizes the node's time after power outages or software upgrades. If you check the Use NTP/SNTP Server check box, enter the server's IP address in the next field. If you do not use an SNTP server, complete the Time and Time Zone fields. The ONS 15600 SDH will use these fields for alarm dates and times.
SNTP Server	Displays the SNTP server IP address.
Location
Latitude	Allows you to set the latitude of the NE. Select North or South from the drop-down list; then, enter the degrees and minutes (or click the up and down arrows to increase or decrease each by 1 unit).
Longitude	Allows you to set the longitude of the NE. Select East or West from the drop-down list; then, enter the degrees and minutes (or click the up and down arrows to increase or decrease each by 1 unit).
Date and Time
Time	Displays the NE date and time.
Time Zone	Displays the time zone where the NE is located.
Use Daylight Savings Time	If checked, Daylight Savings Time is observed.

B.12.1.3  Network Tab

The Network tab displays information about the NE network address. The Network tab contains the following subtabs:

•Address Subtab

•Static Routes Subtab

•OSPF Subtab

•OSPF Area Range Subtab

•OSPF Virtual Links Subtab

•SNMP Subtab

•Firewall/Proxy Subtab

•Routing Table Subtab

•Internal Subnet Subtab

B.12.1.3.1  Address Subtab

The Address subtab allows you to view and change information about the NE network address.

Table B-249 Field Descriptions for the Address Subtab 

Field	Description
IP Address	Displays the IP address of the NE.
Default Router	Displays the IP address of the default router.
Subnet Mask	Displays the subnetwork mask ID of the NE.
MAC Address	Displays the ONS 15600 SDH address as it is identified on the IEEE 802 MAC layer.
Forward DHCP Requests	If checked, forwards DHCP requests to the IP address entered in the DHCP Server field. When the Forward DHCP Requests check box is unchecked, the field is read-only.
DHCP Server	Displays the IP address of the DHCP server.

B.12.1.3.2  Static Routes Subtab

The Static Routes subtab allows you to view information about CTM and ONS 15600 SDH connectivity and create or delete static routes.

Table B-250 Field Descriptions for the Static Routes Subtab 

Field	Description
Destination IP	Displays the IP address of the computer running CTM.
Subnet Mask	Displays the subnetwork mask.
Next Hop	Displays the IP address of the router port or the node IP address if the CTM computer is connected to the node directly.
Cost	Displays the number of hops between the ONS 15600 SDH and the computer.

B.12.1.3.3  OSPF Subtab

The OSPF subtab displays OSPF information. OSPF is a link state Internet routing protocol.

Table B-251 Field Descriptions for the OSPF Subtab 

Field	Description
Slot	Displays the slot number.
Port	Displays the port number.
DCC OSPF Area ID	Displays the number that identifies the ONS 15600 SDH as a unique OSPF area. The OSPF area number can be from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255. The number must be unique to the LAN OSPF area.
SDCC Metric	Sets a cost for sending packets across the SDCC, which is used by OSPF routers to calculate the shortest path. This value should always be higher than the LAN metric. The Cisco default DCC metric is 100. This value is normally unchanged.
OSPF Active on LAN	If checked, enables the ONS 15600 SDH OSPF topology to be advertised to OSPF routers on the LAN. Enable this field on ONS 15600 SDHs that directly connect to OSPF routers.
LAN Port Area ID	Displays the OSPF area ID for the router port where the ONS 15600 SDH is connected. (This number is different from the DCC OSPF Area ID.)
Router Priority	Displays the value used for this NE in designated router election. The Cisco default value is zero (0). A router that has Router Priority set to 0 is ineligible to become a designated router on the attached network.
Dead Interval	Displays the number of seconds that will pass while an OSPF router's packets are not visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the Cisco default.
Retransmit Interval	Displays the time that will elapse before a packet is resent. Five seconds is the Cisco default.
Hello Interval	Displays the number of seconds between OSPF hello packet advertisements sent by OSPF routers. Ten seconds is the Cisco default.
Transit Delay	Displays the service speed. One second is the Cisco default.
LAN Metric	Displays a cost for sending packets across the LAN. This value should always be lower than the DCC metric. Ten is the Cisco default.
Authentication Type	Displays Simple Password if the router where the ONS 15600 SDH is connected uses authentication. Otherwise, it displays No Authentication.
Authentication Key	Displays the OSPF key (password) if authentication is enabled.
Confirm Authentication Key	Retype the authentication key to confirm it.

B.12.1.3.4  OSPF Area Range Subtab

The OSPF Area Range subtab allows you to view information about OSPF area ranges and create or delete area ranges.

Table B-252 Field Descriptions for the OSPF Area Range Subtab 

Field	Description
Range Address	Displays the area IP address for the ONS 15600 SDHs that reside within the OSPF area. For example, if the ONS 15600 SDH OSPF area includes nodes with IP addresses 10.10.20.100, 10.10.30.150, 10.10.40.200, and 10.10.50.250, the range address would be 10.10.0.0.
Range Area ID	Displays the OSPF area ID for the ONS 15600 SDHs. This is either the ID in the DCC OSPF Area ID field or the ID in the Area ID for LAN Port field.
Mask Length	Displays the subnet mask length.
Mask	Displays the subnet mask IP address.
Advertise	Indicates whether the OSPF routing table is advertised.

B.12.1.3.5  OSPF Virtual Links Subtab

The OSPF Virtual Links subtab allows you to view information about OSPF virtual links and create or delete virtual links.

---

Note You cannot create a new virtual link unless OSPF is active on the LAN.

---

Table B-253 Field Descriptions for the OSPF Virtual Links Subtab 

Field	Description
Neighbor	Displays the router ID of the Area 0 router.
Transit Delay	Displays the service speed. One second is the Cisco default.
Retransmit Interval	Displays the time that will elapse before a packet is resent. Five seconds is the Cisco default.
Hello Interval	Displays the number of seconds between OSPF hello packet advertisements sent by OSPF routers. Ten seconds is the Cisco default.
Dead Interval	Displays the number of seconds that will pass while the packets of an OSPF router are not visible before its neighbors declare the router down. Forty seconds is the Cisco default.
Authentication Type	Displays the authentication type.
Authentication Key	Displays the authentication key.

B.12.1.3.6  SNMP Subtab

The SNMP subtab allows you to view SNMP information and create or delete SNMP trap destinations.

Table B-254 Field Descriptions for the SNMP Subtab 

Field	Description
IP Address	The IP address of the NMS.
Community Name	The SNMP community name. Note The SNMP community string cannot be blank in CTM. If a blank community string is required in CTC builds earlier than R4.6, you must set the blank community string in CTC.
UDP Port	The UDP port for SNMP. The Cisco default UDP port is 162.
Trap Version	The trap version, either SNMP version 1 or version 2. See your NMS documentation to determine whether to use SNMP version 1 or version 2.

B.12.1.3.7  Firewall/Proxy Subtab

The Firewall/Proxy subtab allows you to use an NE as a proxy server and/or as a firewall.

Table B-255 Field Descriptions for the Firewall/Proxy Subtab 

Field	Description
Proxy Setting
Enable Proxy	If checked, enables the proxy to allow the NE to relay packets to DCC-only connected NEs. Disabling the proxy prevents the NE from relaying packets to DCC-only connected NEs, and can lead to a loss of connectivity.
With Port	Displays the port that is used by the proxy server. The port is 1080.
Firewall Setting
Enable Firewall	If checked, blocks packets routed between the local area and DCC networks. This causes a loss of connectivity to DCC-only connected NEs. CTM cannot reestablish the connection unless the proxy is enabled. Additionally, all NEs connected to the LAN must also have their firewall enabled, or connectivity problems will result.

B.12.1.3.8  Routing Table Subtab

The Routing Table subtab allows you to view the OSPF routing table.

Table B-256 Field Descriptions for the Routing Table Subtab 

Field	Description
Destination	Displays the IP address of the destination network or host. Destination (0.0.0.0) is the default route entry. All undefined destination network or host entries on this routing table will be mapped to the default route entry.
Mask	Displays the subnet mask used to reach the destination host or network. Mask (0.0.0.0) is always 0 for the default route.
Gateway	Displays the IP address of the gateway used to reach the destination network or host. All outbound traffic belonging to this network is sent to this gateway. Gateway (172.20.214.1) is the default gateway address. All outbound traffic that cannot be found in this routing table or is not on the nodes local subnet will be sent to this gateway.
Usage	Shows the number of times the listed route has been used.
Interface	Shows the ONS 15600 SDH interface used to access the destination. Values are: •cpm0—The ONS 15600 SDH Ethernet interface (that is, the RJ-45 jack on the TCC+/TCC2 and the LAN 1 pins on the backplane) •pdcc0—An SDCC interface (that is, an OC-N trunk card identified as the SDCC termination) •lo0—A loopback interface

B.12.1.3.9  Internal Subnet Subtab

The Internal Subnet subtab allows you to change the class B subnet address for TSC cards. TSC cards perform all system-timing functions for each ONS 15600 SDH. To avoid IP address conflicts, you should change the class B subnet address if your internal network uses the same address range as the default subnet addresses.

Table B-257 Field Descriptions for the Internal Subnet Subtab 

Field	Description
TSC1	Enter the class B subnet address for the first TSC.
TSC2	If two TSCs are installed, enter the class B subnet address for the second TSC.

B.12.1.4  DCC Tab

The DCC tab allows you to create, delete, and view SONET and SDH DCCs.

Table B-258 Field Descriptions for the DCC Tab 

Field	Description
SDCC Terminations	Displays the slot, port, and card type of an SDCC termination.
OSPF Disabled on Link	Check to prevent the advertisement of the OSPF routing table.
Admin State	Displays the state of the SDCC termination.

B.12.1.5  Timing Tab

The Timing tab contains the following subtabs:

•General Subtab

•Reference List Subtab

•Status Subtab

•Timing Report Subtab

B.12.1.5.1  General Subtab

The General subtab displays general timing information.

Table B-259 Field Descriptions for the General Subtab 

Field	Description
General Timing
Timing Mode	Set to External if the ONS 15600 SDH derives its timing from a BITS source wired to the backplane pins; set to Line if timing is derived from an OC-N card that is optically connected to the timing node.
SSM Message Set	Choose the SSM set level supported by your network. SSM is a SONET protocol that communicates information about the quality of the timing source. SSM messages are carried on the S1 byte of the SONET Line layer. They enable SONET devices to automatically select the highest quality timing reference and to avoid timing loops. If a Generation 1 node receives a Generation 2 message, the message will be mapped down to the next available Generation 1. For example, an ST3E message becomes an ST3.
Revertive	If checked, the ONS 15600 SDH reverts to a primary reference source after the conditions that caused it to switch to a secondary timing reference are corrected.
Reversion Time	Specify the reversion time in half-minute increments.
Hold Off Time	If a value other than zero is provided, this is the amount of time the ONS 15600 SDH will wait before including a previously failed timing source as available and valid. The Cisco default is None.
BITS Facilities
E1, T1, 2.048 MHz, 64 KHz	Select the speed of the BITS facility.
State	Set the BITS reference to IS or OOS. For nodes set to Line timing with no equipment timed through BITS Out, set the state to OOS. For nodes using External timing or Line timing with equipment timed through BITS Out, set the state to IS.
Coding	Set to the coding used by your BITS reference, either B8ZS or AMI.
Framing	Set to the framing used by your BITS reference, either ESF or SF (D4). SSM is not available with Super Frame.
Sync Messaging	If checked, enables the Synchronization Status Message (SSM) for BITS In. (SSM is not available if Framing is set to Super Frame.)
Cable Type	Type of cable. Values are 75 ohm or 120 ohm.
Sa Bit	The Sa Bit is used to transmit the SSM message. Available Sa bits are Sa4, Sa5, Sa6, Sa7, and Sa8.

B.12.1.5.2  Reference List Subtab

The Reference List subtab provides timing reference information.

Table B-260 Field Descriptions for the Reference List Subtab 

Field

Description

NE References

Allows you to define three timing references (Ref-1, Ref-2, Ref-3). The node uses Reference 1 unless a failure occurs on that reference, in which case, the node uses Reference 2. If that fails, the node uses Reference 3, which is typically set to Internal Clock. This is the Stratum 3 clock provided on the TCC+. The options displayed depend on the Timing Mode setting. •Timing Mode set to External—Options are BITS-1, BITS-2, and Internal Clock. •Timing Mode set to Line—Options are the node's working optical cards and Internal Clock. Select the cards/ports that are directly or indirectly connected to the node wired to the BITS source; that is, the node's trunk cards. Set Reference 1 to the trunk card that is closest to the BITS source. For example, if Slot 5 is connected to the node wired to the BITS source, select Slot 5 as Reference 1.

B.12.1.5.3  Status Subtab

The Status subtab displays timing status information.

---

Note If you change any values in the Status subtab and click Apply at the bottom of the screen, the values are not set. Instead, use the following buttons to apply changes:

•Clear—Releases any existing switch request. For example, if you issue a Force Switch and then issue a Clear, the Force Switch request is released.

•Manual Switch—Switches the timing reference from one source to another.

•Force Switch—Switches the timing reference from one source to another. This request has a higher priority than the Manual Switch request.

---

Table B-261 Field Descriptions for the Status Subtab 

Field	Description
NE Clock
NE Reference	Set the NE timing reference to internal, BITS-1, or BITS-2.
Status	Displays the status of the NE clock.
Operations	Execute a switch on the NE timing reference.
BITS-1 Out
BITS-1 Out	Set the BITS-1 out timing reference.
Status	Displays the status of the BITS-1 out timing reference.
Operations	Execute a switch on the BITS-1 out timing reference.
BITS-2 Out
BITS-2 Out	Set the BITS-2 out timing reference.
Status	Displays the status of the BITS-2 out timing reference.
Operations	Execute a switch on the BITS-2 out timing reference.

B.12.1.5.4  Timing Report Subtab

The Timing Report subtab summarizes the NE's current timing settings.

B.12.1.6  Protection Tab

The Protection tab contains the following subtabs:

•Protection Groups Subtab

•Operations Subtab

B.12.1.6.1  Protection Groups Subtab

The Protection Groups subtab displays a list of available protection groups and allows you to create, delete, and view protection groups.

Table B-262 Field Descriptions for the Protection Groups Subtab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups
Displays a list of available protection groups. Click the Create or Delete button to create a new protection group or delete an existing one.
Selected Protection Group
Name	Modify the name of the selected protection group. The name can have up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
Type	Choose the protection type (1:1, 1:N, or 1+1) from the drop-down list. The protection selected determines the cards that are available to serve as protect and working cards. For example, if you choose 1:N protection, only DS-1N and DS-3N cards are displayed. 1+1 protection is only used for optical cards.
Protect Module	Choose the protect card if using 1:1 or 1:N protection.
Available Entities	Displays a list of available entities. You can toggle between available and working entities.
Working Entities	Displays a list of working entities. You can toggle between working and available entities.
Bidirectional Switching	Click if you want both the transmit and the receive channels to switch if a failure occurs on one. This option is only available if you select 1+1 (port) type.
Revertive	If checked, the ONS 15600 SDH reverts traffic to the working card or port after failure conditions are corrected and remain correct for the amount of time entered in Reversion Time.
Reversion Time	If Revertive is checked, enter the amount of time following failure condition correction that should elapse before the ONS 15600 SDH switches back to the working card or port.

B.12.1.6.2  Operations Subtab

The Operations subtab displays protection group operation information.

Table B-263 Field Descriptions for the Operations Subtab 

Field	Description
Protection Groups	Displays a list of available protection groups.
Protection Group Details	Displays details about the selected protection groups and allows you to execute switch commands.
Switch Commands	Allows you to perform a manual switch, perform a forced switch, or clear the existing command switching.
Inhibit Switching	Allows you to inhibit unlock switching, lock out switching, or lock on switching.

B.12.1.7  NE Defaults Tab

The NE Defaults tab displays a list of default thresholds for the ONS 15600 SDH NE. You can load different NE defaults using the NE Defaults Management window. See 4.5.10  Restoring NE Defaults, page 4-78.

B.12.1.8  Security Tab

The Security tab allows you to view and edit the security advisory message for the ONS 15600 SDH NE. The security tab contains the following subtabs:

•Advisory Message Subtab

•Preview Subtab

B.12.1.8.1  Advisory Message Subtab

The Advisory Message subtab allows you to edit the NE's advisory message.

Table B-264 Field Descriptions for the Advisory Message Subtab

Subtab

Description

Advisory Message

The existing message is a default, noncustomer-specific disclaimer. If you want to edit this statement with specifics for your company, you can change the text. You can also use the following HTML commands to format the text: <b> Begins boldface font </b> Ends boldface font <center> Aligns type in the center of the window </center> Ends the center alignment <font=n, where n = point size> Changes the font to the new size </font> Ends the font size command <p> Creates a line break <sub> Begins subscript </sub> Ends subscript <sup> Begins superscript </sup> Ends superscript <u> Starts underline </u> Ends underline

B.12.1.8.2  Preview Subtab

The Preview subtab allows you to view the advisory message before saving it.

B.12.1.9  Alarm Tab

The Alarm tab allows you to change default alarm severities by creating unique alarm profiles for individual ONS 15600 SDH nodes. The Alarm tab contains the following subtabs:

•Profile Subtab

•Alarm Behavior Subtab

B.12.1.9.1  Profile Subtab

The Profile subtab allows you to select, create, or delete alarm profiles.

Table B-265 Field Descriptions for the Profile Subtab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile Name	Choose an alarm profile for the NE from the drop-down list. Click Create to create a new alarm profile for the NE. Click Delete to delete an alarm profile from the NE.
Condition	Displays the alarm condition.
Severity	Displays the alarm severity.

B.12.1.9.2  Alarm Behavior Subtab

The Alarm Behavior subtab allows you to change default alarm severities by creating unique alarm profiles.

Table B-266 Field Descriptions for the Alarm Behavior Subtab 

Field	Description
Alarm Profile	Choose a global alarm profile for the NE from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	If checked, all alarms are suppressed.
Slot Number	Displays the location of the module.
Equipment Type	Displays the type of module in the slot.
Profile	Choose an alarm profile for the slot from the drop-down list.
Suppress Alarms	Indicates whether or not the alarms for the particular card are suppressed. If checked, all alarms are suppressed for the port.

B.12.1.10  Maintenance Tab

The ONS 15600 SDH hardware keeps track of which copies of data (backplane STS), SYNC, O&M, and CLK are currently being used by I/O and CXC cards.

B.12.1.10.1  Preferred Copy Subtab

The Preferred Copy subtab allows you to change the preferred data source and view the clock and SYNC copy.

Table B-267 Field Descriptions for the Preferred Copy Subtab 

Field	Description
Preferred Data	Allows you to select the data copy (CXC) when both the CXC cards are present in the system.
Selected Data	Displays the data copy currently being used.
Preferred Clock	Displays the preferred clock and SYNC copy.
Selected Clock	Displays the clock and SYNC copy currently being used.

B.12.1.11  Alarm Extenders Tab

The Alarm Extenders tab allows you view external alarm information. The Alarm Extenders tab contains the following subtabs:

•External Alarms Subtab

•External Controls Subtab

B.12.1.11.1  External Alarms Subtab

The External Alarms subtab allows you to view and update external alarm information.

Table B-268 Field Descriptions for the External Alarms Subtab 

Field	Description
Input Number	The alarm input number.
Enabled	Check to activate the fields for the alarm input number.
Alarm Type	Choose an alarm type from the provided list.
Severity	Choose a severity from the list.
Raised When	Choose the contact condition that will trigger the alarm in CTC.
Virtual Wire	To assign the external device to a virtual wire, choose a virtual wire from the list, or choose None if no assignment is required.
Description	A default description is provided in this line for every external alarm that is enabled.
Raised	Indicates if an alarm has been raised.
Contact Status	Indicates the current status of the contact.

B.12.1.11.2  External Controls Subtab

The External Controls subtab allows you to view and update external controls.

Table B-269 Field Descriptions for the External Controls Subtab 

Field	Description
Control Number	The control number.
Enabled	Check to activate the fields for the control number.
Control Type	Choose a control type from the provided list.
Trigger Type	Choose a trigger type: a local minor, major, or critical alarm; a remote minor, major, or critical alarm; or a virtual wire activation.
Description	Enter a description.
Current State	The current state of the control.
Auto State	The auto state of the control.
Contact Setting	The current contact setting.

B.12.1.12  MS-SPRing Tab

The MS-SPRing tab allows you to view MS-SPRing information and create new MS-SPRings. MS-SPRings share the ring bandwidth equally between working and protection traffic. Half of the payload bandwidth is reserved for protection in each direction, making the communication pipe half-full under normal operation. Click Create to create a new MS-SPRing; click Delete to delete an existing MS-SPRing; click Ring Map to open the Ring Map; click Squelch Table to open the Squelch table.

Table B-270 Field Descriptions for the MS-SPRing Tab 

Field	Description
Type	Indicates whether the fiber type is 2-fiber or 4-fiber.
Rate	Select the MS-SPRing rate.
Ring ID	Assign a ring ID (a number from 0 to 9999). Nodes in the same MS-SPRing must have the same ring ID.
Node ID	Assign a node ID. The node ID identifies the node to the MS-SPRing. Nodes in the same MS-SPRing must have unique node IDs.
Ring Reversion	Set the amount of time that will pass before the traffic reverts to the original working path. The Cisco default is 5 minutes. All nodes in a MS-SPRing should have the same ring reversion setting, particularly if never (nonrevertive) is selected.
Span Reversion	Set the amount of time to pass before the span reverts to the working path.
East Line	Assign the east MS-SPRing port.
East Switch	Displays a list of switch commands for the east port.
West Line	Assign the west MS-SPRing port.
West Switch	Displays a list of switch commands for the west port.
East Protect	For the 4-fiber MS-SPRing, assign the east MS-SPRing protect port.
West Protect	For the 4-fiber MS-SPRing, assign the west MS-SPRing protect port.

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.13  ONS 15800 and ONS 15801 NE Explorer

When you choose Configuration > NE Explorer for the ONS 15800 or ONS 15801, the window displayed by CTM consists of a tree on the left side and a node properties pane on the right. (See Figure B-18.) The tree provides a hierarchical view and alarm status of the NE and its racks, subracks, and slots. The properties pane shows information about the selected entity. See Node Properties Pane—ONS 15800, ONS 15801 for more information.

Figure B-18 NE Explorer—ONS 15800

B.13.1  Node Properties Pane—ONS 15800, ONS 15801

The ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 node properties pane displays information about the NE that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. The properties pane contains the following tabs:

•Node View Tab

•Identification Tab

•Address Tab

•Config Tab

•Statistics Tab

B.13.1.1  Node View Tab

The Node View tab displays a graphic of the ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Moving the mouse pointer over the NE, its racks, subracks, or slots displays the current alarms for the highlighted item. Double-clicking a rack, subrack, or slot displays the selected item in the NE Explorer. The right-click menu opens the Alarm Browser or the Equipment Inventory table for the selected entity.

B.13.1.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays the NE identification information.

Table B-271 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the selected NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801).
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Type	Displays the ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 NE type: •Terminal—Represents the default setting, where it is not possible to identify whether the NE type is east or west terminal.
	•Terminal East—Contains one transmit east-to-west section (wavelength converters, multiplexers, transmit power amplifiers) and one receive west-to-east section (line preamplifier, demultiplexer, optional receive transponders).
	•Terminal West—Contains one transmit west-to-east section (wavelength converters, multiplexers, transmit power amplifiers) and one receive east-to-west section (preline amplifier, demultiplexer, optional receive transponders).
	•Optical Line Amplifier—Amplifies signals in two stages through preline and booster optical amplifiers. •Optical ADM—Exchanges high-volume traffic between terminal and intermediate sites. •Full Blue Optical ADM—Exchanges high-volume traffic between terminal and intermediate sites by applying full add and drop channels on the blue-band. •Full Red Optical ADM—Exchanges high-volume traffic between terminal and intermediate sites by applying full add and drop channels on the red band. •Full Red-Blue Optical ADM—Exchanges high-volume traffic between terminal and intermediate sites by applying full add and drop channels on both the blue and red bands. •Regeneration—Retimes, reshapes, and retransmits the optical signal between optical line amplification (OLA) sites. •Unknown—NE type is unknown. •Other—NE type is not specified.
Vendor Name	Displays the vendor name.
Running Software	Displays the NE software version of the agent that it is currently running.
Active Software	Displays the primary or active version of the NE software.
Standby Software	Displays the secondary or standby version of the NE software.
Location Name	Displays the geographic location of the selected NE.

B.13.1.3  Address Tab

The Address tab provides address information for the NE. If you change an address, the NE is reset automatically to make the new address selection valid.

Table B-272 Field Descriptions for the Address Tab 

Field	Description
Active IP Address	Displays either the primary or secondary IP address, depending on which address is currently used to reach the selected NE.
Primary IP Address	Displays the primary IP address.
Secondary IP Address	Displays the backup IP address that the CTM server uses to reach the selected NE. When the primary and secondary IP addresses are the same, the secondary IP address is not supported. For ONS 1580x NEs, the secondary IP address points to a backup address that is remapped to the ONS 1580x primary address. This backup address allows CTM to reach the ONS 1580x node through a different route by using Layer 3 routing instead of the less-secure Layer 2 routing. If you change the primary IP address when the ONS 1580x is in service or under maintenance, the actual node IP address changes. CTM resets the NE automatically to activate the new IP address. After resetting the active IP address, the primary IP address and secondary IP address have the same value. If you want to reset the secondary IP address, you should first reset the network address translator (NAT) address on the router to map the NAT address to the new Control and Monitoring Processor (CMP) address.
Subnetwork Mask	Identifies the subnetwork mask for the selected NE.
Default Router	Displays the IP address of the default router for the NE.

B.13.1.4  Config Tab

The Config tab provides configuration information for the NE.

Table B-273 Field Descriptions for the Config Tab 

Field	Description
SNTP Details	Shows the NE clock synchronization configuration. The SNTP protocol synchronizes the NE clock. The Server IP Address field displays the IP address of the SNTP server where the time is loaded. The Resync Time field displays the number of minutes between two different time requests to the server. A zero value disables the functionality. The minimum value is 10 minutes; the maximum value is 604,800 minutes (420 days).
Alarm Correlator Status	Shows the current status of the NE alarm correlator. Values are: •Loaded—The NE alarm correlator is loaded. •Not Loaded—The NE alarm correlator is not loaded because of missing configuration files. •Disable—The NE alarm correlator is disabled. All pending alarms are posted to CTM. •Enable—The NE alarm correlator is active; the correlator filters alarms. •Stand By—The NE alarm correlator is stopped; no pending masked alarms are raised to CTM.
NE Date and Time Settings	Shows the date and time settings of the NE. You can change the date and time in the text box.
Slot Management	Allows you to manage the slot status. If a module is extracted from a monitored slot, a module extraction alarm is emitted with the severity defined in the Module Extraction Severity field. If a module is replaced with an incompatible module, a module mismatch alarm is emitted with the severity defined in the Module Mismatch Severity field. Note The module extraction and module mismatch alarms are defined at the NE level and the severity is the same for all managed slots on the selected NE. Note This feature is applicable only for TL1 Agent R2.0 and later.
NE Alarm Log Management	Allows you to manage the NE alarm log status. Enter a log file size in the Alarm Log File Size field. Select a status (Stopped or Active) from the Alarm Log Status drop-down list. Note This feature is applicable only for TL1 Agent R2.0 and later.

B.13.1.5  Statistics Tab

The Statistics tab shows you alarm statistics for the selected ONS 15800 or ONS 15801. The Statistics tab is visible only for TL1 Agent R2.0 and later.

Table B-274 Field Descriptions for the Statistics Tab 

Field	Description
Log free space	Shows the percentage of free space left for the log.
Alarms in last whole hour	Shows the total number of alarms sent in the last whole hour.
Alarms in the current hour	Shows the total number of alarms sent in the current hour.
Max alarms per hour in last 24h	Shows the maximum number of alarms sent per hour in the last 24 hours.
Average alarms in last 24h	Shows the average number of alarms sent per hour in the last 24 hours. The average is shown in alarms per second.
Average alarms in last 60 secs	Shows the average number of alarms sent in the last 60 seconds. The average is shown in alarms per second.

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.13.2  Rack Properties—ONS 15800, ONS 15801

The rack properties pane displays information about the ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 rack that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. The rack properties pane contains the following tabs:

•Rack View Tab

•Identification Tab

B.13.2.1  Rack View Tab

The Rack View tab displays a graphic of the ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 rack that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Moving the mouse over the rack, subracks, or slots displays the current alarms for the highlighted item. Double-clicking a subrack or slot in the graphic displays the subrack or slot in the NE Explorer. The right-click menu opens the Alarm Browser or Equipment Inventory table for the selected entity.

B.13.2.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays the rack identification information.

Table B-275 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the rack is installed.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801).
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack.

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.13.3  Subrack Properties—ONS 15800, ONS 15801

The subrack properties pane displays information about the ONS 15800 or ONS 15801 subrack that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. The subrack properties pane contains the following tabs:

•Subrack View Tab

•Identification Tab

B.13.3.1  Subrack View Tab

The Subrack View tab displays a graphic of the subrack that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Moving the mouse over the subrack and its slots displays the current alarms for the highlighted item. Double-clicking a subrack or slot in the graphic displays the subrack or slot in the NE Explorer. The right-click menu opens the Alarm Browser or Equipment Inventory table for the selected entity.

B.13.3.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays the subrack identification information.

Table B-276 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the subrack is installed.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15800 or ONS 15801).
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.14  ONS 15808 NE Explorer

When you choose Configuration > NE Explorer for the ONS 15808, the window displayed by CTM consists of a tree on the left side and a node properties pane on the right. (See Figure B-19.) The tree provides a hierarchical view and alarm status of the NE and its physical racks, subracks, and cards. The properties pane shows information about the selected entity. See Node Properties Pane—ONS 15808 for more information.

Figure B-19 NE Explorer—ONS 15808

B.14.1  Node Properties Pane—ONS 15808

The ONS 15808 node properties pane displays information about the ONS 15808 that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. The properties pane contains the following tabs:

•Node View Tab

•Identification Tab

•Address Tab

•Config Tab

•Statistics Tab

B.14.1.1  Node View Tab

The Node View tab displays a graphic of the ONS 15808 that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Moving the mouse pointer over the NE, its racks, its subracks, or its slots displays the current alarms for the highlighted item. Double-clicking a rack, subrack, or slot displays the item in the NE Explorer. The right-click menu opens the Alarm Browser or the Equipment Inventory table for the selected entity.

B.14.1.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays NE identification information.

Table B-277 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the selected NE.
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808).
NE Type	Displays the ONS 15808 NE type: •Terminal—The default setting for a long-haul (LH) site. With this setting, it is not possible to identify whether the NE type is east or west terminal.
	•Terminal East—Contains one transmit east-to-west section (wavelength converters, multiplexers, transmit power amplifiers) and one receive west-to-east section (line preamplifier, demultiplexer, receive transponders) for an LH system.
	•Terminal West—Contains one transmit west-to-east section (wavelength converters, multiplexers, transmit power amplifiers) and one receive east-to-west section (line preamplifier, demultiplexer, receive transponders) for an LH system.
	•Optical Line Amplifier—Amplifies signals in two stages through preline and booster optical amplifiers for an LH system.
	•Optical ADM—Exchanges high-volume traffic between terminal and intermediate sites for an LH system.
	•Regeneration—Retimes, reshapes, and retransmits the optical signal between OLA sites for an LH system.
	•ELH Terminal—The default setting for an extended long-haul (ELH) system. It is not possible to identify whether the NE type is east or west terminal with this setting.
	•ELH Terminal East—Contains one transmit east-to-west section (wavelength converters, multiplexers, transmit power amplifiers) and one receive west-to-east section (line preamplifier, demultiplexer, receive transponders) for an ELH system.
	•ELH Terminal West—Contains one transmit west-to-east section (wavelength converters, multiplexers, transmit power amplifiers) and one receive east-to-west section (line preamplifier, demultiplexer, receive transponders) for an ELH system.
	•ELH Optical Line Amplifier—Amplifies signals in two stages through preline and booster optical amplifiers for an ELH system.
	•ELH Optical ADM—Exchanges high-volume traffic between terminal and intermediate sites for an ELH system.
	•ELH Regeneration—Retimes, reshapes, and retransmits the optical signal between OLA sites for an ELH system.
NE Type (Continued)	•Unknown—NE type is unknown.
	•Other—NE type is not specified.
Vendor Name	Displays the vendor name. The default vendor name is Cisco Systems.
Running Software	Displays the NE software version of the agent that it is currently running.
Active Software	Displays the primary or active version of the NE software.
Standby Software	Displays the secondary or standby version of the NE software.
Location Name	Displays the geographic location of the selected NE.

B.14.1.3  Address Tab

The Address tab provides address information for the NE. If you change an address, the NE is reset automatically to make the new address selection valid.

Table B-278 Field Descriptions for the Address Tab 

Field	Description
Active IP Address	Displays either the primary or secondary IP address, depending on which address is currently used to reach the selected NE.
Primary IP Address	Displays the primary IP address.
Secondary IP Address	Displays the backup IP address that the CTM server uses to reach the selected NE. When the primary and secondary IP addresses are the same, the secondary IP address is not supported. For ONS 15808 NEs, the secondary IP address points to a backup address that is remapped to the ONS 15808 primary address. This backup address allows CTM to reach the ONS 15808 node through a different route by using Layer 3 routing instead of the less-secure Layer 2 routing. If you change the primary IP address when the ONS 15808 is in service or under maintenance, the actual node IP address changes. CTM resets the NE automatically to activate the new IP address. After resetting the active IP address, the primary IP address and secondary IP address have the same value. If you want to reset the secondary IP address, you should first reset the NAT address on the router to map the NAT address to the new CMP module address.
Subnetwork Mask	Identifies the subnetwork mask for the selected NE.
Default Router	Displays the IP address of the default router for the NE.

B.14.1.4  Config Tab

The Config tab provides configuration information for the NE.

Table B-279 Field Descriptions for the Config Tab 

Field	Description
SNTP Details	Shows the NE clock synchronization configuration. The SNTP protocol synchronizes the NE clock. The Server IP Address field displays the IP address of the SNTP server where the time is loaded. The Resync Time field displays the number of minutes between two different time requests to the server. A zero value disables the functionality. The minimum value is 10 minutes; the maximum value is 604,800 minutes (420 days).
Alarm Correlator Status	Shows the current status of the NE alarm correlator. Values are: •Loaded—The NE alarm correlator is loaded. •Not Loaded—The NE alarm correlator is not loaded because of missing configuration files. •Disable—The NE alarm correlator is disabled. All pending alarms are posted to CTM. •Enable—The NE alarm correlator is active; the correlator filters alarms. •Stand By—The NE alarm correlator is stopped; no pending masked alarms are raised to CTM.
NE Date and Time Settings	Shows the date and time settings of the NE. You can change the date and time in the text box.
Slot Management	Allows you to manage the slot status. If a module is extracted from a monitored slot, a module extraction alarm is emitted with the severity defined in the Module Extraction Severity field. If a module is replaced with an incompatible module, a module mismatch alarm is emitted with the severity defined in the Module Mismatch Severity field. Note The module extraction and module mismatch alarms are defined at the NE level, and the severity is the same for all managed slots on the selected NE.
NE Alarm Log Management	Allows you to manage the NE alarm log status. Enter a log file size in the Alarm Log File Size field. Select a status (Stopped or Active) from the Alarm Log Status drop-down list. Note This feature is available only if the TL1 Agent is version 2.0 or later.

B.14.1.5  Statistics Tab

The Statistics tab shows alarm statistics for the selected ONS 15808.

Table B-280 Field Descriptions for the Statistics Tab 

Field	Description
Log free space	Shows the percentage of free space left for the log.
Alarms in last whole hour	Shows the total number of alarms sent in the last whole hour.
Alarms in the current hour	Shows the total number of alarms sent in the current hour.
Max alarms per hour in last 24h	Shows the maximum number of alarms sent per hour in the last 24 hours.
Average alarms in last 24h	Shows the average number of alarms sent per hour in the last 24 hours. The average is shown in alarms per second.
Average alarms in last 60 secs	Shows the average number of alarms sent in the last 60 seconds. The average is shown in alarms per second.

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.14.2  Rack Properties—ONS 15808

The rack properties pane displays information about the ONS 15808 rack that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. The rack properties pane contains the following tabs:

•Rack View Tab

•Identification Tab

B.14.2.1  Rack View Tab

The Rack View tab displays a graphic of the ONS 15808 rack that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Moving the mouse over the rack, subracks, or slots displays the current alarms for the highlighted item. Double-clicking a subrack or slot in the graphic displays the subrack or slot in the NE Explorer. The right-click menu opens the Alarm Browser or Equipment Inventory table for the selected entity.

B.14.2.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays rack identification information.

Table B-281 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the rack is installed.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808).
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack.

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.14.3  Subrack Properties—ONS 15808

The subrack properties pane displays information about the ONS 15808 subrack that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. The subrack properties pane contains the following tabs:

•Subrack View Tab

•Identification Tab

B.14.3.1  Subrack View Tab

The Subrack View tab displays a graphic of the subrack that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Moving the mouse over the subrack and its slots displays the current alarms for the highlighted item. Double-clicking a subrack or slot in the graphic displays the subrack or slot in the NE Explorer. The right-click menu opens the Alarm Browser or Equipment Inventory table for the selected entity.

B.14.3.2  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays the subrack identification information.

Table B-282 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the user-defined name of the NE where the subrack is installed.
NE Model	Identifies the model of the selected NE (ONS 15808).
Description	Displays information that a user has entered (if any) to describe the NE.
Rack ID	Displays the identification number of the rack where the subrack is installed.
Subrack ID	Displays the identification number of the subrack.

---

Note See Table 1-21 on page 1-45 for the descriptions of the actions that can be performed using the action buttons at the bottom of the window.

---

B.15  Unmanaged NE/Other Vendor Node Properties Pane

The Unmanaged NE/Other Vendor node properties pane displays information about unmanaged NEs or nodes from other vendors. The properties pane contains an Identification tab.

B.15.1  Identification Tab

The Identification tab displays identification information about the unmanaged or other-vendor NE.

Table B-283 Field Descriptions for the Identification Tab 

Field	Description
NE ID	Displays the ID of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
Description	Displays the description of the NE from the Domain Explorer.
NE Model	Displays Unmanaged as the NE model type.
NE Type	Displays Not Applicable as the NE type.
NE Version	Displays the NE version.
Serial Number	Displays the serial number of the NE.
Location Name	Displays the name of the physical location of the NE.
Subnetwork ID	Displays the assigned subnetwork ID of the NE.
Network Partition ID	Displays the network partition ID of the NE.

B.16  XR 12000 NE Explorer

When you choose Configuration > NE Explorer for the Cisco XR 12000, the window displayed by CTM consists of a tree on the left side and a rack view graphic on the right. (See Figure B-20.) The tree provides a hierarchical view and alarm status of the device's racks, slots, ports, and line cards. Empty slots do not appear on the tree. The Rack View window displays the router processors, line cards, and chassis that the XR 12000 controls. Empty slots and unmanaged cards are visible in the Rack View window. The NE Explorer is ported from the XR 12000 craft web interface (CWI).

The Configuration and Administration menus in the NE Explorer window allow you to configure the XR 12000 device. When these menu options are selected, corresponding application windows appear. See 5.4  Configuring the CRS-1 and XR 12000, page 5-29 for detailed information about the Configuration and Administration menu options. A user with read-only access can perform read-write operations in the XR 12000 NE Explorer.

---

Note The number that appears in the Rack View and application window names indicates the number of windows launched on the right side of the NE Explorer.

---

Figure B-20 NE Explorer—XR 12000

B.16.1  Rack View

The Rack View window displays a graphic of the XR 12000 line-card chassis that is selected in the NE Explorer tree. Moving the mouse over the graphic displays the current number of critical, major, minor, and warning alarms for the rack, slot, or card. The right-click menu opens the Alarm Browser or the Alarm Log for the selected entity.